Service Manual: Digital Video Camera Recorder

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
RMT-820
SERVICE MANUAL
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
Revision History How to use Acrobat Reader
LEVEL
US Model Canadian Model

DCR-DVD100
AEP Model UK Model East European Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model
DCR-DVD100E
E Model
Photo: DCR-DVD100
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Link
SPECIFICATIONS SERVICE NOTE DISASSEMBLY BLOCK DIAGRAMS FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS PRINTED WIRING BOARDS REPAIR PARTS LIST
For INSTRUCTION MANUAL, refer to SERVICE MANUAL, LEVEL 1 (987627341.pdf). Since a service is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK ASSY (A-7111-651-A) and not for the single MD-097 board, complete. Reference No. search on printed wiring boards is available. On the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 board
This service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 board. Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board, waveforms, mounted parts location and electrical parts list of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 board are not shown. The following pages are not shown. Disassembly ...................................... Pages 2-24 to 2-26 Mounted parts location ......................... Pages 4-109 to 4-111 Schematic diagram ........................... Pages 4-27 to 4-76 Exploded views .................................... Pages 5-11 to 5-12 Printed wiring board .......................... Pages 4-95 to 4-102 Electrical parts list ................................ Pages 5-16 to 5-30 Waveforms .......................................... Pages 4-105 to 4-106
Digital Video Camera Recorder
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
SPECIFICATIONS
Video camera recorder
System Video recording format DVD-Video DVD-VR (DVD-RW only) Audio recording system 2ch Dolby* Digital Video signal DCR-DVD100 : NTSC color, EIA standards DCR-DVD100E : PAL colour, CCIR standards Usable discs 8 cm DVD-R and DVD-RW Video compression format MPEG2/JPEG (Still images) Recording/playback time HQ: Approx. 20 minutes SP: Approx. 30 minutes LP: Approx. 60 minutes Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color) Image device 4.5 mm (1/4 type) CCD (Charge Coupled Device) Number of Pixels DCR-DVD100 : Gross: Approx. 680 000 pixels DCR-DVD100E : Gross: Approx. 800 000 pixels Effective : DCR-DVD100 : Approx. 340 000 pixels DCR-DVD100E : Approx. 400 000 pixels Lens Carl Zeiss Combined power zoom lens Filter diameter: 30 mm (1 3/16 in.) 10 (Optical), 120 (Digital) F = 1.7 2.2 * Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Focal length 3.3 33 mm (5/32 1 5/16 in.) When converted to a 35 mm still camera 42 420 mm (1 11/16 16 5/8 in.) Color temperature Auto, HOLD (Hold), nIndoor (3 200 K), Outdoor (5 800 K) Minimum illumination 5 lx (lux) (F 1.7) 0 lx (lux) (in the NightShot mode)* * Objects unable to be seen due to the dark can be shot with infrared lighting. Input/Output connectors S video input/output 4-pin mini DIN Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms), unbalanced Chrominance signal: DCR-DVD100: 0.286 Vp-p DCR-DVD100E: 0.3 Vp-p 75 (ohms), unbalanced Audio/Video input/output AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p, 75 (ohms), unbalanced, sync negative 327 mV, (at output impedance of more than 47 k (kilohms)) Output impedance of less than 2.2 k (kilohms)/Stereo minijack ( 3.5 mm) Input impedance of more than 47 k (kilohms) USB jack mini-B Control jack Stereo mini-minijack ( 2.5 mm) MIC jack Stereo minijack ( 3.5 mm) LCD screen Picture 6.2 cm (2.5 type) Total number of pixels 123 200 (560 220) General Power requirements 7.2 V (battery pack) 8.4 V (AC adaptor) Average power consumption (when using the battery pack) During camera recording using LCD 6.5 W Viewfinder 5.5 W Operating temperature 0C to 40C (32F to 104F) Storage temperature 20C to + 60C (4F to + 140F) Dimensions (Approx.) 66 94 142 mm (2 5/8 3 3/4 5 5/8 in.) (w/h/d) Mass (approx.) 640 g (1 lb 6 oz) main unit only 730 g (1 lb 9 oz) including the battery pack, disc and lens cap Supplied accessories See page 5-32.
AC adaptor AC-L15A
Power requirements 100 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz Current consumption 0.35 0.18 A Power consumption 18 W Output voltage DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the operating mode Operating temperature 0C to 40C (32F to 104F) Storage temperature 20C to + 60C (4F to + 140F) Dimensions (approx.) 56 31 100 mm (2 1/4 1 1/4 4 in.) (w/h/d) excluding projecting parts Mass (approx.) 190 g (6.7 oz) excluding power cord
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FM50

Maximum output voltage DC 8.4 V Output voltage DC 7.2 V Capacity 8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh) Dimensions (approx.) 38.2 20.5 55.6 mm (1 9/16 13/16 2 1/4 in.) (w/h/d) Mass (approx.) 76 g (2.7 oz) Operating temperature 0C to 40C (32F to 104F) Type Lithium ion Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
DCR-DCVD100/DVD100E
WARNING!! WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 30 cm FROM THE SURFACE OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.
CAUTION: The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye hazard. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION : Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.
ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT LA SCURIT! LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PICES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SCURIT DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PISES SONY DONT LES NUMROS SONT DONNS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPMENTS PUBLIS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer. 1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are "pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270C during repairing. Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board (within 3 times). Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering. Unleaded solder Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the leadfree mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead. (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
2. 3.
4.
5. 6.
: LEAD FREE MARK Unleaded solder has the following characteristics. Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40C higher than ordinary solder. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time. Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to about 350C. Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful! Strong viscosity Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such as on IC pins, etc. Usable with ordinary solder It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may also be added to ordinary solder.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. SERVICE NOTE
1-1. SERVICE NOTE 1-1 1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS 1-1 2. TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT) 1-1 3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE OPTICAL PICK-UP 1-1 4. PRECAUTION FOR CHECKING EMISSION OF LASER DIODE 1-1 1-2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 1-2 1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 1-2 2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY 1-2 3. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE 1-2 PD-188 (1/2)(LCD DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-13 PD-188 (2/2)(BACKLIGHT DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-15 LB-084 (EVF CONNECTOR, EVF BACK LIGHT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-17 FP-608 (USB, LANC) FLEXIBLE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-18 MA-420 (PITCH/YAW SENSOR, REMOTE SENSOR, MIC) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-19 CK-127 (CONNECTOR, FUNCTION SWITCH) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-21 FB-220 (FUNCTION SWITCH) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-23 FP-610 (EXT MIC) FLEXIBLE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-23 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (KP-CX5500, PS-CX5500) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-25 Shematic diagram of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC307 board are not shown. Pages from 4-27 to 4-78 are not shown. FP-611 (AUDIO/VIDEO JACK) FLEXIBLE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-79 4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS CD-428 (CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-83 PD-188 (LCD DRIVE, BACKLIGHT DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-85 LB-084 (EVF CONNECTOR, EVF BACK LIGHT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-87 FB-220 (FUNCTION SWITCH) PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-87 MA-420 (PITCH/YAW SENSOR, REMOTE SENSOR, MIC) PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-89 CK-127 (CONNECTOR, FUNCTION SWITCH) PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-91 FP-612 (PANEL REVERSE) FLEXIBLE PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-91 FP-608 (USB, LANC) FLEXIBLE PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-93 FP-609 (PLUNGER, EJECT) FLEXIBLE PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-93 FP-610 (EXT MIC) FLEXIBLE PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-93 FP-611 (AUDIO/VIDEO JACK) FLEXIBLE PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4-93 Printed wiring board of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 board are not shown. Pages from 4-95 to 4-104 are not shown. 4-4. WAVEFORMS 4-105
2.
2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 2-5. 2-6. 2-7. 2-8. 2-9. 2-10. 2-11. 2-12. 2-13. 2-14. 2-15. 2-16. 2-17. 2-18. 2-19. 2-20. 2-21. 2-22. 2-23. 2-24. 2-25. 2-26. 2-27.
DISASSEMBLY
F PANEL SECTION 2-2 MA-420 BOARD 2-2 CABINET (R) SECTION 2-3 SIDE CABINET (25) ASSEMBLY 2-4 P CABINET (C)(25M) ASSEMBLY 2-5 LCD UNIT 2-6 PD-188 BOARD 2-6 LIQUID CRYSTAL INDICATOR MODULE 2-7 LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY 2-7 CK-127 BOARD 2-8 FB-220 BOARD 2-8 LOUD SPEAKER (1.6 cm) 2-9 TRIPOD (LARGE) 2-9 CONTROL SWTICH BLOCK (KP-CX5500), CABINET (R) (25) ASSEMBLY 2-10 BATTERY PANEL SECTION 2-10 EVF SECTION 2-11 LB-084 BOARD (REMOVING OF THE EVF)-1 2-12 LB-084 BOARD (REMOVING OF THE EVF)-2 2-13 LB-084 BOARD (REMOVING OF THE EVF)-3 2-14 LENS SECTION 2-15 LENS DEVICE (LSV-650E) 2-16 VC-307 BOARD 2-17 MD-097 BLOCK ASSEMBLY 2-19 CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-CX5500) 2-20 FP-609 FLEXIBLE BOARD 2-21 CIRCUITE BOARDS LOCATION 2-22 FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION 2-23 Disassembling procedure of MD-097 block assembly are not shown. Pages from 2-24 to 2-26 are not shown.
HELP (List of caution points is shown here.)
3.
3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. 3-5. 3-6. 3-7.
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) 3-1 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/4) 3-3 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/4) 3-5 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4) 3-7 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) 3-9 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) 3-11 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3) 3-13
4.
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/3) 4-1 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/3) 4-3 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (3/3) 4-5 4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS CD-428 (CCD IMAGER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-11 FP-609 FLEXIBLE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4-12
Waveforms of the VC-307 board is not shown. Pages from 4-106 to 4-107 are not shown. 4-5. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION 4-107 Mounted parts location of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 are not shown. Pages from 4-110 to 4-114 are not shown.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5.
REPAIR PARTS LIST
5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS 5-3 5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION 5-3 5-1-2. F PANEL AND BATTERY PANEL SECTION 5-4 5-1-3. LENS SECTION 5-5 5-1-4. EVF SECTION 5-6 5-1-5. MD SECTION 5-7 5-1-6. CABINET (L) SECTION 5-8 5-1-7. CABINET (R) SECTION 5-9 5-1-8. LCD SECTION 5-10 Exploded view and parts list of MD-097 BLOCK are not shown. Page 5-11 and 5-12 are not shown. 5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST 5-12 Electrical parts list of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC307 board are not shown. Pages from 5-17 to 5-31 are not shown.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-1. SERVICE NOTE
1. POWER SUPPLY DURING REPAIRS
SECTION 1 SERVICE NOTE
In this unit, about 10 seconds after power is supplied to the battery terminal using the regulated power supply (8.4V), the power is shut off so that the unit cannot operate. This following two methods are available to prevent this. Take note of which to use during repairs. Method 1. Use the AC power adaptor (AC-L15, AC-VQ800 etc.). Method 2. Connect the servicing remote commander RM-95 (J-6082-053-B) to the LANC jack, and set the commander switch to the ADJ side.
2.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)

Refer to page 2-2 to remove the front panel assembly. Refer to page 2-3 to remove the cabinet (R) assembly. Refer to page 2-10 to remove the battery panel section. Refer to page 2-11 to remove the EVF block. Remove the VC-307 board. Refer to page 2-15 to remove the lens block and the accessory shoe. While pushing the portion A in the direction of the arrow, push the OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow and open the disc cover.
Open switch
Plunger
MD-097 board
3.
NOTES ON HANDLING THE OPTICAL PICK-UP
4.
The laser diode may suffer electrostatic breakdown because of the potential difference generated by the charged electrostatic load, etc. on clothing and the human body. During repair, pay attention to electrostatic breakdown and also use the procedure in the printed matter which is included in the repair parts. The flexible board is easily damaged and should be handled with care.
PRECAUTION FOR CHECKING EMISSION OF LASER DIODE
Laser light of the equipment is focused by the object lens in the optical pick-up so that the light focuses on the reflection surface of the disc. Therefore, be sure to keep your eyes more then 30 cm apart from the object lens when you check the emission of laser diode.
1-1
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
1-2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

1. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION 2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY
When problems occur while the unit is operating, the self-diagnosis function starts working, and displays on the viewfinder, or LCD screen what to do. This function consists of two display; selfdiagnosis display and service mode display. Details of the self-diagnosis functions are provided in the Instruction manual.
Viewfinder or LCD screen
C:31:11
When problems occur while the unit is operating, the counter of the viewfinder or LCD screen consists of an alphabet and 4-digit number, which blinks at 3.2Hz. This 5-character display indicates the repaired by:, block in which the problem occurred, and detailed code of the problem.
Blinks at 3.2Hz
C
Repaired by: C : Corrected by customer H : Corrected by dealer E : Corrected by service engineer
31
Block
11
Detailed Code
Self-diagnosis Code Table. Indicates the appropriate step to be taken. E.g. 31 ....Reload the disc. 32 ....Turn on power again.
Note: The self-diagnosis display data will be kept even if the lithium battery (CK-127 board BT5201 of the cabinet (R) assembly) is removed.
3.
Repaired by:
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE

Self-diagnosis Code Block Detailed Function Code 0 1 2 2 6 4 3 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Symptom/State Correction
C C C E E
Non-standard battery is used. Faulty disc is used. Condensation. EEPROM data are rewritten. Difficult to adjust focus (Cannot initialize focus.)
Zoom operations fault (Cannot initialize zoom lens.)
Use the InfoLITHIUM battery. Use a compatible disc with the camcorder. Remove the disc, and insert it again after one hour. Make EEPROM data correct value. (Note) Inspect the lens block focus reset sensor (Pin 7 of CN1201 of VC307 board) when focusing is performed when the control dial is rotated in the focus manual mode and inspect the focus motor drive circuit (IC1203 of VC-307 board) when the focusing is not performed. Inspect the lens block zoom reset sensor (Pin qh of CN1501 of VC-307 board) when zooming is performed when the zoom switch is pressed and inspect the zoom motor drive circuit (IC1203 of VC-307 board) when the zooming is not performed.
E E E
6 9 9
2 3 4
0 0 0
0 0 1
Handshake correction function does not work well. (With pitch angular velocity Inspect angular velocity sensors (SE5501, 5502 of MA-420 board) peripheral circuits. sensor output stopped.) Inspect the USB bridge IC (MD-097 board IC4202) and EEPROM USB bridge IC fault (MD-097 board IC4201) Fault of writing to or erasing the flash Inspect the flash memory (VC-307 board IC3401) (Note) memory
Note: Refer to 8. Record of Self-diagnosis check of 6-3. SERVICE MODE, ADJ (987627351.pdf).
1-2E
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY
HELP
The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
PD-188 board service position

DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE DVD DRIVE SECTION
DISASSEMBLY
PD
-1
88
MD
09
7 07
DISASSEMBLY
VC
-3
DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLY
VC
-3
07
PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE VC-307 BOARD. (SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE DVD DRIVE SECTION)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2-1. F PANEL SECTION ..................................... 2-3. CABINET (R) SECTION .............................. 2-15. BATTERY PANEL SECTION........................ 2-16. EVF SECTION.............................................. 2-20. LENS SECTION........................................... 2-22. VC-307 BOARD............................................ SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE DVD DRIVE SECTION.................................. (page 2-2) (page 2-3) (page 2-10) (page 2-11) (page 2-15) (page 2-17) (page 2-18)
2-1
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. F PANEL SECTION
Caution
The FP-605 flexible board may be damaged if you remove the F panel section forcibly. Be very careful not to damage the flexible board.
2 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)
7 F panel section
6 FP-605 flexible board (22P)
5 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black) 3 Open the jack cover (F)
2-2. MA-420 BOARD
1 Microphone unit (4P)
MA
-4
20
2 Three tapping screws (M1.7 3.5)
3 MA-420 board
2-2
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-3. CABINET (R) SECTION
Caution
The FP-602 flexible board may be damaged if you remove the cabinet (R) section forcibly. Be very careful not to damage the flexible board.
4 Two screws (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)
VC
30
7
1 Open the jack cover (U)
q; FP-602 flexible board (39P) 8 FP-602 flexible board (39P) 3 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)
5 Three screws (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)
9 Cabinet (R) section
7 CPC lid (bottom)
2-3
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-4. SIDE CABINET (25) ASSEMBLY
3 Set the LCD panel, as shown in the figure.
CK
-12
1 Three tapping screws (M1.7 5)
CK
-12
7 5 Side cabinet (25) assembly
2-4
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-5. P CABINET (C)(25M) ASSEMBLY

2 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (silver)
3 Five claws
4 P cabinet (C) (25) assembly
88 -1 PD
[PD-188 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]
VC-307 board
V C -3
PD-188 board
7 0
DC-IN connector
88 -1 PD
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)
LANC jack
AC power adaptor CPC-8 jig (J-6082-388-A)
AC IN
2-5
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-6. LCD UNIT

1 Close the LCD panel.
4 PV-018 harness (20P)
CK -12 7
7 LCD unit 3 FP-612 flexible board (6P)
2 Tape (HS) 6
Caution
Attach the Tape (HS) as shown in the illustration. Tape (HS)
CK -12 7
5 Two screws (M1.7 4), grip
2-7. PD-188 BOARD

4 P cabinet (C) (25M) assembly 3 Five claws 2 Two screws (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (silver) 8 Hinge assembly
1 Two screws (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (silver)
6 Liquid crystal indicator module 5 Back light Cold cathode fluorescent tube
PD
8 18
7 PV-018 harness (20P) 9 Screw (M1.7 2.5) lock ace, p2 qa PD-188 board
q; Two claws
2-6
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-8. LIQUID CRYSTAL INDICATOR MODULE
1 P frame assembly (25)
3 P lock spring
2 P lock button
5 Back light Cold cathode fluorescent tube 4 Claw
6 Liquid crystal indicator module
7 P cabinet (M) (25)
2-9. LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY
7 FP-612 flexible board 2 Screw (M1.7 2.5) lock ace, p2
3 Claw
1 4 Hinge cover (U) (25) 5 Claw 8 PV-018 harness
9 LCD Hinge assembly 6 Hinge cover (O) (25)
2-7
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-10.CK-127 BOARD
5 CK-127 board
CK
4 Five tapping screws (M1.7 3.5)
-12
3 Control switch block (KP-CX5500) (6P) 2 Loud speaker (1.6 cm) (2P)
2-11.FB-220 BOARD
5 Open the jack cover (U) 3 Screw (M1.7 2.5) lock ace, p2 2 FP-607 flexible board (6P)
6 1 Tape (0716) 4 Three tapping screws (M1.7 3.5)
8 Screw (M1.7 2.5) lock ace, p2 9 FP-610 flexible board (6P)
Caution
Attach the Tape (0716) as shown in the illustration.
q; Screw (M1.7 2.5) lock ace, p2
Tape (0716)
FB
-22
7 FB muffle sheet
FP-607 flexible board
qs FB-220 board qa FB retainer sheet metal
2-8
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-12.LOUD SPEAKER (1.6 cm)
Caution
Attach the Tape (0716) as shown in the illustration. Loud speaker (0.6 cm) Tape (0716)
4 Loud speaker (0.6 cm)
1 Tape (0716)
3 Speaker retainer (25) 2 Screw (M1.7 2.5)
2-13.TRIPOD (LARGE)
2 Two tapping screws (M1.7 3.5)
3 Bottom frame
1 Three screws (M1.7 4), grip
4 Tripod (large)
2-9
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-14.CONTROL SWTICH BLOCK (KP-CX5500), CABINET (R) (25) ASSEMBLY
3 Cabinet (R) (25) assembly
2 Control switch block (KP-CX5500)
1 Two tapping screws (M1.7 5)
2-15.BATTERY PANEL SECTION

4 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black) 2 Raise the Finder. 5 Claw
VC
30
7
6 Battery panel section
1 Battery terminal board (6P)
3 Screw (M1.7 2.5), lock ace, p2
2-10
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-16.EVF SECTION
2 Raise the EVF
5 EVF section
VC
30
2-11
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-17.LB-084 BOARD (REMOVING OF THE EVF)-1
2 VF blind
1 Two claws
Caution
When installing the VF blind, fold the FP-603 flexible board as shown in the illustration.
FP-603 flexible board
7 Eye cup (55) assembly
4 VF hinge assembly, VF tilt cabinet
2-12
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Visibility knob (40)
VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly To raise the VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly, insert a flat head (-) screwdriver into the position shown by the arrow. VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly
2 A
3 B 5 C
1 Tapping screw (M1.7 3.5)
2 A
VF slide cabinet (lower)
2 Open the lock of the VF slide cabinet (lower) in the direction of the arrow A, 3 while slanting the VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly in the direction of the arrow B, 4 remove the Visibility knob (40) from the VF slide cabinet (lower), and 5 remove the VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly by sliding it in the direction of the arrow C.
RE-ASSEMBLING THE VF SLIDE CABINET

1 VF slide assembly
2 Align the dotted portion of the VF slide assembly with the dotted line of the VF slide cabinet (lower).
When re-assembling, slide the Visibility knob (40) to the fully right-end beforehand. Visibility knob (40) When re-assembling is completed, the VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly and the VF slide cabinet (lower) are assembled as shown. VF slide cabinet (upper) assembly
3 Slide the VF slide cabinet assembly up to the position in the direction of the arrow where the two claws are locked.
VF slide cabinet (lower) VF slide cabinet (lower) Two claws
2-13
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E

1 Two screws (M1.7 2.5), lock ace, p2
2 Pull out the VF slide assembly fully in the direction of the arrow.
VF slide Cabinet (upper) assembly
VF slide assembly, etc.

A 3 Slide the VF slide cabinet assembly and others once to the deep end, then slant them in the direction of the arrow A to release the claw portion of the VF slide assembly and finally pull them out in the direction of the arrow B and remove them.
6 Remove the LCD cabinet assembly and others from the two dowels and cut-outs of the VF slide assembly.
Caution
When attach the Sheet (VF), fold the FP-603 flexible board as shown in the illustration. FP-603 flexible board Sheet (VF)
VF slide assembly
4 Screw (M1.7 2.5), lock ace, p2 Cut-outs
Two dowels
Caution
qs Lamp guide (40) qj LCX032AN-5 (16P) 7 Sheet (VF) qa Cushion LB (40) q; Two craws 8 FP-603 flexible board qh LCD cabinet assembly qg LCX032AN-5 qf Prism sheet (40) 9 Two craws qd Illuminator (40)
Be careful not to drop the Prism sheet (40) and the Illuminator (40).
Caution
Be careful not to drop the Cushion LB (40). Projected part
qk LB-084 board
2-14
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-20.LENS SECTION
q; Water packing
9 Lens section
Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)
VC
7 30
Tapping screw (M1.7 3.5)
6 CD heat transe holder 2 Flexible board (from the lens device) (24P) 3 FP-606 flexible board (27P) 7 Two tapping screws (M1.7 3.5)
VC
5 Harness (CV-068) (2P)
-3
07
2-15
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-21.LENS DEVICE (LSV-650E)

4 CD heat sink (650) 3 Outer connector (hot shoe), Lens frame (650), etc
1 Two tapping screws (M1.7 3.5)
Caution
CD radiation sheet
qf Lens (650) sheet
qg Lens device (LSV-650E)
qa Remove the soldering
9 Optical filter block q; Seal rubber (W) qs CCD block assembly
qd CD-428 board 5 Two tapping screws (M1.7 5) 8 CD radiation sheet 6 Harness (CV-068) (XXP)
2-16
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-22.VC-307 BOARD
Caution
Attach the flexible retainer cushion as shown in the illustration.
07
VC
-3
Flexible retainer cushion
5 Control switch block (PS-CX5500) (14P)
7 Board to board connector (100P)
0 D-
97
q; Heat sink, sheet radiation (A), sheet radiation (B) 1 FP-605 flexible board (22P)
3 C-
07
8 Flexible retainer cushion
9 VC-307 board
6 Three screws (M1.7 2.5), lock ace, p2
3 Two screws (M1.7 2.5), lock ace, p2 4 FP-611 flexible board, JK frame
2-17
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
[SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE DVD DRIVE SECTION] Connection to Check the VTR Section
To check the DVD drive section, set the DVD drive to forced PLAY mode. Operate the DVD drive using the adjustment remote commander (with the HOLD switch set in the OFF position). Setting the forced PLAY mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 00. 3) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. Exiting the forced PLAY mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 00. 3) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. 4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
CPC-8 jig (J-6082-388-A)

CN4902 CN4901
M D -0 9 7
Extension cable (100P) (J-6082-352-A)
VC-307 board AC IN AC power adaptor
CN4001 CN1008
V C -3 0
LANC jack
CN1009
7
AUDIO/ VIDEO jack
Battery panel section
DC-IN jack
Adjustment remote commander (RM-95) Monitor TV
PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE VC-307 BOARD. (SERVICE POSITION) TO CHECK THE DVD DRIVE SECTION)
1 2-1. 2 2-3. F PANEL SECTION ..................................... CABINET (R) SECTION .............................. (page 2-2) (page 2-3)
3 2-15. BATTERY PANEL SECTION........................ (page 2-10) 4 2-16. EVF SECTION.............................................. (page 2-11) 5 2-20. LENS SECTION........................................... (page 2-15) 6 2-22. VC-307 BOARD............................................ (page 2-17)
2-18
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-23.MD-097 BLOCK ASSEMBLY
2 Zoom blind 1 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)
MD
9 -0
Caution
3 NS knob (650), NS base (650)
D-
09
4 Tape (0716)
FP-608 flexible board Tape (0716)
MD
09
7
Caution
Precautions during handling
Be sure to place the DVD drive with its optical pickup facing upward. Hold the frame. Do not touch the optical pickup surface.
8 Three tapping screws (M1.7 5) 9 MD-097 block assembly
Refer to level 3
Disassembling procedure of MD-097 block assembly.
Optical pickup
Caution
Use the adjustable wrist strap (J-2501-162-A) as the preventive measure for static electricity when the removing and installing the drum assemb ly because the drum assembly of this mechanism beck is easily affected by the static electricity. (J-2501-162-A)
2-19
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-24.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-CX5500)

Caution
Caution
Align the hole of the receptacle with the projection of the projected part, and install the Control switch block (PS-CX5500).
Cabinet (L) Control switch block (PS-CX5500) Receptacle hole Mode dial Projected part Mode dial
Control switch block (PS-CX5500) Tape (0716)
5 Control switch block (PS-CX5500)
3 Tape (0716)
4 Three tapping screws (M1.7 5)
Caution
When installing the Control switch block (PS-CX5500), set the power switch of cabinet (L) section to its OFF position.
2 FP-608 flexible board
Power switch
ONF R OFWE PO
2-20
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-25.FP-609 FLEXIBLE BOARD

When pusing the portion A in the direction of the arrow, push the open switch in the direction of the arrow and open the disc cover. Open switch
Plunger
Open switch Disc cover

1
Plunger
3 PWB retainer sheet metal
6 Solenoid cover 5 Tapping screw (M1.7 3.5)
7 FP-609 flexible board
2-21
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-26.CIRCUITE BOARDS LOCATION

LB-084 CD-428 SS-174T MD-097
FB-220
MA-420
CK-127
VC-307
PD-188
NAME CD-428 CK-127 FB-220 LB-084 MA-420 MD-097 PD-188 SS-174T
FUNCTION CCD IMAGER CONNECTOR, FUNCTION SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH EVF CONNECTOR, EVF BACK LIGHT PITCH/YAW SENSOR, REMOTE SENSOR, MIC RF, SKEW SENSOR, DVD DSP, MECHA DRIVE, UCON, FLASH, LATCH, USB I/F, CONNECTOR, DC/DC CONVERTER LCD DRIVE, BACK LIGHT DRIVE TSB SHOCK SENSOR DC/DC CONVERTER, A/D CONVERTER, TIMING GENERATOR, EVR, CAMERA PROCESS, LENS DRIVE, DVD SYSTEM CONTROL, 128M SDRAM, 16M FCRAM, DVD CODEC, 64M SDRAM, VIDEO IN/OUT, VIDEO A/D CONVERTER, EVF DRIVE, CAMERA CONTROL, HI CONTROL, HI/DIGITAL STILL CONTROL, 32M FLASH MEMORY, AUDIO I/O, MIC AMP, PITCH/YAW SENSOR AMP, CONNECTOR, DD CONNECTOR
VC-307
2-22
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-27.FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
FP-604
FP-606
FP-607 FP-602
FP-610
FP-605
FP-611
FP-612
FP-603 FP-609
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-CX5500)
FP-608
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (KP-CX5500)
FP-629
FP-228
Disassembling procedure of MD-097 block assembly are not shown. Pages from 2-24 to 2-26 are not shown.
2-23E
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2003.08.29
HELP
Sheet attachment positions and procedures of processing the flexible boards/harnesses are shown.
CABINET (R) SECTION

Tape (HS) Loud speaker (0.6 cm) Tape (0716) Tape (0716)
LENS SECTION
CD radiation sheet
EVF SECTION
FP-603 flexible board Sheet (VF) FP-603 flexible board
HELP
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
OVERALL
M
VC 7 30
D-
09
Flexible retainer cushion Flexible board (from the FP-608 flexible board) Tape (0716)
MD SECTION
Two OP sheets
0 D-
97
Tape (0716)
CABINET (L) SECTION
Control swtch block (PS-CX5500) Tape (0716)
HELP
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Link
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/4) OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/4) OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4) POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/3) POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/3)
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4)

CD-428 BOARD
LENS ASSY
( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.
VC-307 BOARD(1/3)
(2/18) (4/18)
30 42 AF5 68 I 61 43 XSYS RST 54 AD5 IFI Y0-IFI Y7 IFI Y0-IFI Y7 AG4 AD6 AF4 AD7 W27 R24 Y26 U23 HD0-HD15 Y27 AA26 T24 AA27 AB26 V23 AB27 U24 HD0-HD15 88 92 96 AG3 AF3 SPCK SPCK B27
IRIS (SHUTTER)
(1/18)
IC1401 IC5001
8 CCD IMAGER 1-4 10-12 V1-V4 RG,H1,H2 20-23 7-4 CN1301 16 15 2 1 44 HD,VD 110 111 5-9 18-21 XSHD,XSHP,PBLK,CLPDM CH SO,SCK CN5001 13 14 CCD OUT 30
IC3501
DVD SYSTEM CONTROL V27 P24 CN1008 73 75 84 82 86 90 94 W26 T23
IC1302
SH,AGC A/D CONV.
2 I 11
AD0-AD13 AD0-AD9
AD0-AD9
131 I 121
CAMERA PROCESS
CN1301
AG5 AG6 23 19 16 47 48 59 I 56 AD9 IFI C0-C3 IFI C0-IFI C7 AD8 AG7 AC12 AF7 CLPOB CLPOB 112 70 71 4 HD,VD 72 31 12 40 38 35 37 CAM SO,SI,SCK VCK XSYS RST 51 52 50 SHUTTER ON 133 EN0,DIR 0A,DIR 0B EN1,DIR 1A,DIR 1B 139 I 144 FC RST SENS ZM RST SENS 137 12 IRIS PWM 138 A0-A11 85 74 D0-D9 103 94 VCK 46 59 68 IFI HD IFI VD IFI OE IFI HD IFI VD IFI OE AF6
CN5001
2
95 HA0-HA2 HA0-HA2 XATA REST 97 98
AD10 AG8 AG9 V24 AD26 W24 AE27 XATA REST
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/4) (MD-097)
(PAGE 3-5)
X1301 36MHz 5 25 31 18 21 23
(1/18)
45
IC1301
TIMING GENERATOR
61
(9/18)
B2 IFI Y0-IFI Y7
| 52 49
IC2001
Y OUT C OUT 2 6 21 XRST VTR 41 76 66 64 63 VIDEO A/D CONV.
(6/18)
IFI C0-IFI C7 IFI HD IFI VD IFI OE L26 K24 J27 K27 SD0-SD7 M23 L27 AFCK M26 M27 AF8 G24 P26 SCLK27 D23 F27 G26 VDIO0-VDIO7 H24 G27 H26 K26 D27 E27 VDIN0-VDIN7 F26 P27 N23 E24 E26 T26 VC0-VC7 U26 AC13 AC14 P23 U4 U2 U1 V1 ADRSO 0 | ADRSO 10 AD11 AG10 AF9 AF13 AD13-AD21 N26 B23 HD C ADCK R5 A4 DATA 0 | DATA 31 Y1 Y2 D0 27 | W2 V1 V2 T4 U5 R4 V5 U2 T1 R5 M4 P1 P4 N4 M2 L1 M5 M4 D0 LK-D15 LK A23-A26 B23-B26 C27 D21-D27 F24 AUDIO I/O D19 DATA TO SFD 9 7 35 32 AD1 PANEL R PANEL G PANEL B MIC L MIC R PANEL R PANEL G PANEL B TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/4) SEA1 | SEA20 N1 M1 A5 D8 DATA FROM SFD DATA TO SFD SFD BCK 9 8 12 31 68 27 L R CN1009 2 7 5 30 28 L R V J9151 L R AUDIO VIDEO J24 VSP SO X,XVSP SCK X G26 W1 | U4 W5 T2 SED0 | SED15 H27 J24 B21 A21 C VDCKI S VDCKI C ADI1 SFD BCK K1 L2 A1 D7 ADRSO 0 | ADRSO 10 AF12 AF14-AF23 AG14-AG23 AG26 AG24 AF24 AF25 AD22 33 AG25 AD23 37 AF26 AB24 51 AF27 AE26 AA23 44 34 | A10 1 62 29 90 D0 | D31 U27 R26 E1 H4 G4 XSYS RST SADRS1 | SADRS11 C XRST SO 0, SI 0, XSCK 0 F2 E2 T1 T3 K3 H2 R2 T2 H1 J1 H4 G2 K2 M4 D1 E1 N2 P4 F1 G1 N1 P2 J3 L4 DATA 0 | DATA 31 Y4 AA1 AA2 AA4 AB1 AB2 AC1 AC2 1 AC4 AD1 62 AD2 AD4 AD5 AD7 AD9 AE1 AF1-AF6 AG2-AG4 AG6 AG7 AD6 AG5 AG8 AD10 33 AF7 AG9 AC8 37 AF8 51 44 34 A0 | A10 90 29 D0 | D31 M2 N4 J2 M1
| 42 38 37 36 34
IC3701
DVD CODEC W1 Y1 W4 Y2
(3/18)
IRIS DRIVE 2 14
M H
23 24 19 21
DRIVE +,-
IC1201
IRIS DRIVE
(3/18)
HALL +,-
IC1202
10 16 HALL AMP 8 HALL AD
(4/18)
A0-A11 D0-D9 7
B25 F24 10 CLK24 B22
IC3502
AUDIO PLL
(7/18)
(2/18)
IC3801
64Mbit SDRAM(0)
IC1403
30 38 FOCUS RESET SENSOR 40 41 7 FC RST SENS SHUTTER DRIVE 2 4 SHUTTER ON 16Mbit SDRAM
T27 M24
(5/18)
D0 | D15
AD11-AD18 AF9-AF19 AG10-AG20 AD19-AD21
SDATA0 | SDATA31
H24 G27 F26 E4 D4
FOCUS MOTOR
M M
14 11
FOCUS A,B FOCUS XA,XB
14 15 17 18
FOCUS MOTOR DRIVE ZOOM MOTOR DRIVE
9 I 12
EN0,DIR 0A,DIR 0B
IC3601 IC3602
12Mbit SDRAM
A0 | A11
AD23 AF20-AF23 AG21-AG24 W4 V4
4 1
ZOOM A,B ZOOM XA,XB
20 21 23 24
(3/18)
5 I 7
EN1,DIR 1A,DIR 1B
IC1203
ZOOM MOTOR ZOOM RESET SENSOR 16 ZM RST SENS D15 42
(7/18)
IC3803
64Mbit A0 SFRAM(1)
(5/18)
5 NIGHT SHOT XNS SW CN1201
U1 T5 R4 R1 K2 A0 | 1 | P2 N2
IC3603
41
(11/18)
16Mbit FCRAM 94 IRIS PWM
IC3001
(11/18)
128 CAMERA CONTROL 3 4 2 SO, SI, SCK 69 70 67 77 78 75 73 71 X3001 20MHz 1 3 66 65 63 175
HALL AD
A19 20
IC3004
EEPROM
(15/18)
15 16 3 2
L R L R
62 64 56 58
CAM SO,SI,SCK
L2 K1 K2
IC2302
D/A CONV. A/D CONV.
(15/18)
26
IC2301
CH SO,SCK
SP+ SP-
MA-420 BOARD(1/4)
SE5501 YAW SENSOR SE5502 PITCH SENSOR CN5503 12 11 CN1006 8 9 14 12
(16/18)
FP-611 (FLEXIBLE) 3
IC1101
YAW/PITCH SENSOR AMP
18
YAW AD
130
135
(13/18)
2 PITCH AD CN1002 129 9 X3201 48MHz
AC2 AD2 4 J5 G2
IC3202
XTAL OSC
PANEL XHD PANEL XVD EVF R EVF G EVF B
PANEL XHD PANEL XVD EVF R EVF G EVF B
(PAGE 3-3)
AB1 AB2
XSYS RST
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4)
EXT STROBO 239 ZOOM VR AD XLK RST USB D+,USB D238 XLK RST MS BS MS DIO MS SCLK 140
(13/18)
AA2 USB CLK 184 187 SCLK27 XSYS RST 128 7 S XRST C XRST AC13 AD3-AD7 B5-B9 S XRST AF2 AE2 D1 B24 B26 F4 E4 E13 D6-D9 E10 9 Y OUT C OUT 46 7 10 XRST VTR XRST VTR VD SO,SI,SCK VD SO,SI,SCK YOUT COUT
IC3203
(1/2)
DIGITAL STILL CONTROL
(PAGE 3-8)
HI SO,SI,SCK
215 | 213 A1-A22 62 92 D0-D15 60 39
CN1004 FOR ADJUSTMENTS
13 14
(8/18)
USB D+,USB DDO LK-D15 LK MS BS MS DIO MS SCLK 26 10 16 1 48 29 38 36 45 DO LK-D15 LK C OUT VD SO,SI,SCK Y OUT 36 34
18 14 22 39 48 42
Y C V Y C V
CN1006 20 22 3 1 CN5503
G C Y
IC2101
VIDEO IN/OUT AGC ACC
J5501
G
S VIDEO
13 CN1003 FOR ADJUSTMENTS 12 15
(14/18)
IC3401
FLASH MEMORY 32M bit
MA-420 BOARD(2/4)
AUDIO SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL
16
3-1
3-2
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
VC-307 BOARD (2/3)

CN1007 4 11 PANEL R PANEL G PANEL B PANEL HD PANEL VD SP+ SPEVF R EVF G EVF B XRST VTR MIC L MIC R HD VD VD SO,SCK PANEL VG PSIG H START EVF VG EVF VCO HD VD VD SO,SCK 10 30 12 14 15 17 CN5201 CN5202 XHD OUT 36 20 PSIG 29 13 28 26 25 23 VG PANEL R,G,B 12 11 10 9 20 13 12 11 10 9
PD-188 BOARD
CN6201 ND901 BACKLIGHT BL HIGH T6101 Q6102 CN6101 INVERTER 10 BACK LIGHT DRIVE
PANEL R,G,B
48 47 46
(1/2)
IC6001
RGB DRIVE
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4)
CK-127 BOARD (1/2)

XRST VTR 14 14
20 VR,VG,VB 22 24 COM 27 DAC 35 12
PSIG
4 5 3 6
LCD901 2.5 INCH COLOR LCD UNIT
BL REG
40 39
COM DC
(PAGE 3-2)
36 46 45 42 1 48
(1/2)
12 24 Q6101 4 CN6001
IC6002
TIMING GENERATOR 2 8 5
28 2 7 8 12 13 19
|
(2/2)
BL LOW 3 3
IC6102
CURRENT DET
5 6 7 9
35 34 33 31
19 18 17 15
19 18 17 15
22
DETIN HD OUT 5 1 6 EP 2.8V 2 7
CN1003 FOR ADJUSTMENTS
3 5 4 6 7
IC6101
BL CONT 5 5
(2/2)
CN5201 17
4
BL CONT
TO OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4) (VC-307)
(PAGE 3-8)
AUDIO SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL
MA-420 BOARD (3/4)

CN5501 MIC901 MIC UNIT
MIC L MIC R
CN5203 2 1 CN1006 20 3 35 38 39 1 2 EXT MIC L EXT MIC R CN5204 1 2 5 4 SP901 SPEAKER 2 3
FB-220 BOARD (1/2)

CN5301 CN5302 2 3
FP-610 FLEXIBLE (1/2)

J9101 MIC (PLUG IN POWER)
CN5503
(16/18)
EXT MIC L EXT MIC R 22 14 MIC L MIC R EVF VG EVF VCO 36 48 33 3 SHOE MIC L EXT MIC L EXT MIC R
39 38
IC2401
MIC AMP
22
8 CN1001
INTELLIGENT ACCESSORY SHOE (1/2)
EVF R,G,B
48 47 46 40 39
(10/18)
CN2201 20 22 24 14 12 13 11 14 10 3 9 8 10 7 11 18
LB-084 BOARD
R,G,B COM BCK, HCK1/2, HST, EN, STB, VCK, VST CN5602 14 15 13 16 12 9 6 3
LCD902 COLOR EVF UNIT
IC2201
RGB DRIVE
VD SO,SCK VD SO,SCK HD VD XRST VTR VCO
46 45 42 1 48 36 2
(10/18)
24 14
IC2202
TIMING GENERATOR
IC5601
Q5602 8 16 3 CN5601 BACK LIGHT DRIVE D5602 BACK LIGHT
3-3
3-4
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located. Since a service is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK ASSY (A-7111-651-A) and not for the single MD-097 board.
CN4902 FOR ADJUSTMENTS 17 12 14 18
MD-097 BOARD (1/2)

CN4901 73 75 82 84 86 88 HD0-HD15
VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL
BASE UNIT
CN4501 LD ON 6 85 67 (2/7) 42 41
169 170 185 186
HD0-HD15
EFM PK EFM WP RFOP RFON FEO TEO VRCK SCL SCB SCD RF + RF A-K
TO OVER ALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/4) (VC-307)
90 92 94 96 95 98 97 61 HA0-HA2 XATA RESET 29 48 D4903 CN4904 4 6 USB D+,D49 86 88 6 (5/7) 15 13

3 4
IC4601
DVD DSP
7 16 35 34 23 30
LD DRIVE
LASER DIODE
(PAGE 3-2)
HA0-HA2
98 96 99
35 34 25 29 21 19 18 17
(1/7)
72 71 61 69
PD IC
IC4502
RF PROCESS
3 17 18 19
55
FDPD IC OUT
40
FPD IC
CN9001 USB
X4201 30MHz SDA,SCL 5 6
(5/7)
(2/7)
2 13 42 53 20 26 29 35
SBD0-SBD15
126 110 148 133
IC4202
USB 2.0 BRIDGE
78 43
IC4201
EEPROM
IC4602
64Mbit SDRAN
SBA0-SBA13

69
SKEW ADD SKEW SUB 14 8
(1/7)
6 2
TILT PD1 TILT PD2
22 21
TILT PD
X4601 22.5792MHz XRST BRIDGE IC4701 RESET EJECT OK SCK XUSB SEL EJECT RQ XEJECT SW 82
114 132 134 133 142
208 209
IC4504
TILT PD AMP FCS+ FCS-
27 47 (4/7) 55
TO OVER ALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (4/4) (VC-307)
72 68 64 60 62 67
MD0-MD7,AD0-AD19 MA
MD0-MD7 MA
49 55 57
192
FOO
FOO SHOCKA-F
2 3
IC4701
DVD DRIVE CONTROL MD0-MD7,AD8-AD15 29 36 D0 39 46 D15 1 8 16 23 A0 25 26 A18 48 (4/7)
193
FOCUS DRIVE
14 13
1 4
FOCUS COIL
(PAGE 3-8)
TRO
TRO SHOCKA-T
5 6
CN4901 CN4907 3 5 2 16 PLG
TRACKING DRIVE
12 11
TRK+ TRK-
3 2
TRACKING COIL
S9053 OPEN S9051,9052 (LID OPEN) PLUNGER
AD16-AD19
IC4702
FLASH MEMORY MUTE 9
(3/7)
3 4 MD0-MD7,AD8-AD15 7 8 13 14 17 18 55
(4/7)
2 5 6 9 LA1-LA15 12 15 16 19
IC4802
CN4801 SLED MOTOR DRIVE 17 18 15 16 VO4+,VO4VO3+,VO34 6 5 3
Q4901,4902 PLUNGER DRIVE
122
FP-609 FLEXIBLE
CN4908 DEW SENSOR 1 DEW AD 13
IC4703 IC4704
ADDRESS LATCH
196 197 198
FMO FMOS
24 27
SLED MOTOR
DMO FG
72
119
DSP RSTX LD ON SKEW ADD SKEW SUB IN LIMIT X
DSP RSTX
205
65
4 5 6
DC FAN
CN4909 1
Q4906 MOTOR DRIVE FAN DRV

106
CN4802 IN LIMIT X 1 7 (3/7) 3 5 FOO TRO DMO 19 (3/7) 5 3 2
IN LIMIT PD
17 19
110 112
FOMON TRMON
X4701 8MHz
IC4811
BUFFER AMP SPDL EN FG CPU SLED EN SKEW1 SKEW2 SPDL EN SKEW EN FG FG 20 21 18 5 7 8 3 6 (3/7) 2 15 13 12 SKEW1 SKEW2 SKEW1 SKEW EN 4 1
IC4801
SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE
A1 A2 A3
9 8 7 10 11 14 17
M H
SPINDLE MOTOR
7 12
H1+,H1H2+,H2H3+,H3-
128 101 103 104
FG CPU SLED EN SKEW1 SKEW2 SPDL EN SKEW EN XSHK T M XSHK F M
CN4803 (3/7) 7 6 VO3 (+) VO3 (-) 13 12 9 8
IC4804
SKEW MOTOR DRIVE
SKEW MOTOR
89
102 107
17 SPDL EN 14 SKEW EN SKEW2 SKEW EN 4 1
(3/7)
83
IC4803
IC4805
SKEW MOTOR DRIVE
7 6
VO4 (+) VO4 (-)
15 14 11 10
CN5751 SHOCKA-T XSHL-T 2 5 13 12 6 5 12 7
IC5751
T SHOCK SENSOR AMP
1 2 15 16
SE5751 T SHOCK SENSOR
(3/7) XSHK T M XSHK F M 9 7
IC4812
MMV
11 5
SHOCKA-F XSHK-F
3 6
11 10 4 3
12 7
IC5752
F SHOCK SENSOR AMP
1 2 15 16
SE5752 F SHOCK SENSOR
SS-174T BOARD
3-5
3-6
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
FB-220 BOARD (2/2)
S9101 SUPER NS/ COLOR SLOWS CN5302 1 S5301, 5303, 5305 CN5301 BACK LIGHT, 6 FADER, REVIEW S5302, 5304, 5306, 5308, 5310 STOP, REW, PLAY, FF, PAUSE 1
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
VC-307 BOARD (3/3)
CN5201 6 CN1007 34 16 27 (12/18) 5 2 CN5206 6 5 7 33 61 KEY AD2 XEJECT SW 4
204
CK-127 BOARD (2/2)

CN5204
EJECT SW IC4701 RESET XRST BRIDGE EJECT RQ SCK XSUB SEL EJECT OK
67 72 69 62 64 66
5 TO OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM (3/4) (MD-097)
60 KEY AD1
IC4701 RST 18
(13/18)
(PAGE 3-5)
202 203
IC3103
HI CONTROL TXD 23 RXD 24 TXD, RXD, SCK SCK 25
190 TXD 191 RXD 185 SCK
IC3203 (2/2)
HI CONTROL
68 CN1008
FP-612 FLEXIBLE
S9201 PANEL REVERSE
S5212-5216 UP, LEFT, ENTER RIGHT, DOWN
31
66 KEY AD4 EEP TXD 207 EEP RXD 206 EEP SCK 205 5 2 6
(13/18)
IC3302
EEPROM
S002, 003 EXPOSORE, FOCUS
CN5205 6 5 S5207 PANEL CLOSE S5209-5211 VISUAL INDEX, SET UP,REC S5206 DISPLAY/ BATT VIEW
20 HI EVER SO 21 HI EVER SCK 8 12 13 11 10 14 S5203 RESET 5 32 28 27 29 30 26 35 65 KEY AD3 79 DIL A 80 DIL B 3 XBATT VIEW XSYS RST XLK RST ZOOM VR AD EXT STROBO 67 KEY AD5 XSYS RST 47 73 HI XRESET XLK RST 44 X 0A 52 X 1A 51 X TAL 29 X TAL 28 X3102 32.768KHz X3101 10MHz
140 KEY AD4
HI SO 200 HI SI 201 H1 EVER SCK 199 HI, SO, SI, SCK
S001
ADJUST DIAL
3 2 S5201, 5204, 5205 EDIT VOL+, VOL-
1 TO OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM(1/4)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (KP-CX5500) MD-097 BOARD (2/2)
BT5201 LITHIUM BATTERY (SECONDARY)
(PAGE 3-1)
15 15 Since a servic is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK ASSY (A-7111-651-A) and not for the single MD-097 board.
CN1008 41 43 47 41 43 47 CN4901 XVTR ON SW XCAM ON SW XPHOTO STBY SW 1 2 7 CN1002 11 10 9

4
S004 MODE
(Playback) (Still) (Movie)
COTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-CX5500)

S007 POWER ON-OFF(CHG) S003 STARTS/STOP SW S001, 002 PHOTO SW RV001 POWER ZOOM
KEY AD7 69
XPHOTO FREEZE
12 13 2
PHOTO FREEZE PHOTO REC ZOOM AD
KEY ADD 59
J9001 LANC
CN4904 7 51
LANC SIG
FAST CHARGE
50 48
LANC OUT LANC IN
CN1008 CN4901 55 55 53 53
40 LANC OUT 39 LANC IN Q1002, 1003 D5503 (Infrared ray emitter)

6 16
RESET 39 43 3V REG
45 42 41
XRESET VOUT EVER 3.0V 14 71 71 35 35 31 31 14 14 53 VCC 62 35 VTR DO ON 37 FAST CHARGE 75 SHOE ON 74 BATT/XEXT SW
SIRCS PWM 45 IR ON 15 SIRCS SIG 41
LED DRIVE CN1006
NS LED K SIRCS SIG
IC5501
4 REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
17 7
Q3102 IB SO 42 IB SI 43 SHOE ID2 58 SHOE ID1 57 I/F
CN5503
27 28 BL CONT (7/7) VTR DD ON SHOE ON BATT/XEXT SW FAST CHARGE BATT SIG 38 BL REG MT 4.6V A 1.5V D 1.5V D 2.5V WG1 A 2.5V WG1 D 2.5V A 2.8V D 2.8V AU 2.8V EP 2.8V D 3.1V A 4.6V AU 4.6V EP 4.6V DRV A 4.6V DRV MT 4.6V EP 13.5V IMG VH IMG VL PLG VCC BATT UNREG VTR UNREG
Q4022, 4021
MD-420 BOARD (4/4)

CN1007
23
27 27 29 29 20 20
BL CONT
4 TO OVERALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM(2/4) (CK-127)
IC4001
DC/DC CONVERTER, RESET, LANC I/O
(PAGE 3-4)
CN1001 6 5 4 57 57 SHOE UNREG 3 2 1
BT901 CN4001 6 BATTERY TERMINAL
EXT STROBO SHOE ID 1, 2 LANC SIG SHOE UNREG
6 5 4 3 2 1
5 1
INTELLIGENT ACCESSORY SHOE (2/2)
Q4002, 4036
DC IN
4 3 2
SHOE UNREG
3-7
3-8
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)
MD-097 BOARD
BT901 BATTERY TERMINAL CN4001 6 BATT UNREG F4005 1.4A/32V BATT UNREG F4007 1.4A/32V
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
JIG UNREG
CN4902 16 FOR ADJUSTMENTS
5 1
BATT SIG
Q4003, 4004
Q4003, 4004 CHARGE SWITCH
F4004 1.4A/32V SHOE UNREG F4002 1.4A/32V F4006 1.4A/32V
CN4901 11 13 SHOE UNREG
DC IN 4 3 2 BATT/XEXT ACV UNREG
F4003 1.4A/32V
VTR UNREG Q4022, 4021
INIT CHARGE ON
FAST CHARGE
F4001 1.4A/32V
SHOE ON CN4901
14 14
42 Q4009-4010 17 5V 40 16 18 Q4013 SWITCHING L4005 L4014 L4015 20 D 1.5V A 1.5V 5V REG
EP 4.6V EP 13.5V EP 2.8V BL REG BL CONT
27 29 27 29
31 31
33 33
(7/7)
CN1008
VREF
37
CK-127 BOARD (1/2)
VC-307BOARD (1/2)
56
D4005 25 25
IC4001
VCC DC/DC CONVERTER RESET,LANC I/O
RT 30
OUTIP 57
23 23
43
EVER 3.0V
3V REG
1
Q4018 L4004 L4021 BL REG BL CONT 44 38 AU 4.6V AU 2.8V Q4012 SWITCHING TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM(2/3) (VC-307)
OUTIN 55 41 40 IN1 20
CN5201
14 BT5201 LITHIUM BATTERY (SECONDARY) S5203 RESET 5
CN1007
26 35 BATT LI 3V HI XRESET HI CONTROL 14 VCC 53 62
74 74 15 15
D4004
39
BATTERY IN DETECT
(PAGE3-11)
54 55
BATT SENS ACV SENS
71 71
VOUT
OUT2 58 +INE2 14 BL CONT L4006 Q4014 SWITCHING
42
L4029 L4011 L4016 L4023 L4026
PLG VCC A 2.8V D 2.8V AU 2.8V EP 2.8V 32 34 36 50 52 54 56 26 22 24 28 30 D 2.5V D 2.8V MT 4.6V A 4.6V D 1.5V D 3.1V A 2.8V A 1.5V
HI XRESET XRESET BATT IN 75 SHOE ON BATT/XEXT INIT CHARGE ON FAST CHARGE IB SO IB SI VTR DD SENS VTR MODE SW CAM MODE SW XPHOTO STBY SW XLANC PWR ON 8 51 51 VTR DD ON 35 35 35 HI EVER SO HI EVER SCK XCS DD 20 21 49 41 41 43 43 39 39 27 28 26 DIN CLK LD 73 31 47 47 45 45
45 44
RESET
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-CX5500)

Q3102 RV001 ZOOM VR S004 MODE 3 11 10 9 D 2.8V BATT SIG I/F
74 38 37 42 43 56 1 2 7
OUT3 59 IN3 22 VR 34 L4012 L4017 L4022
38
CTL1
19 21 46 48
CN4901 CN1008
Q4016 SWITCHING
L4007
A 4.6V AU 4.6V EP 4.6V DRV A4.6V L4028 L4018 L4024 58 60
IMG VH IMG VL
CN1002
S007 POWER 28 28 30 30
CN1008
IC3103
(12/18)
Q4006 REG
49 52 54
V CONT LANC DC
OUT4 60
L4013
LANC I/O
IN4 23 Q4015 SWITCHING L4002 D 2.5V DRV MT 4.6V MT 4.6V Q4039 2.5V REG L4009 L4019 1 Q4017 SWITCHING L4003 L4027 WG1 D 2.5V WG1 A 2.5V A 2.5V DRV MT 4.6V DRV A 4.6V WG1 D 2.5V WG1 A 2.5V A 2.5V D 2.5V 1 A 2.8V D 1.5V D 2.8V
CN4901
FP-608 FLEXIBLE
CN4904
J9001 LANC 10 LANC DC
OUT5 61 IN5 24
2.8V
2
TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM(3/3)
(7/7)
VSOFT 2.5V REG 3
OUT6 62 IN6 25
IC4003
3.1V REG 7 Q4038
(PAGE 3-13)
L4001
Q4037,4007 L4008
3.1 V REG
D 3.1V IMG VH
D 3.1V
OUT7 63 IN7 2 Q4019 SWITCHING
Q4026 13.5 V REG
EP 13.5V
IMG VL D4006 RECT
FP-609 FLEXIBLE
D9051 LED 6
Q4901,4902 PLUNGER DRIVE CN4907

D 2.8V PLG VCC
VTR DD ON
3-9
3-10
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CK-127 BOARD (2/2)
CN1007 EP 13.5V
22 18
PD-188 BOARD
FB6002
3 3
VC-307 BOARD (2/2)
LB-084 BOARD INTELLIGENT ACCESSORY SHOE

1 2
1
CN5201
Q6003,6004
CN6001
18
LCD901 2.5INCH COLOR LCD UNIT
EP 2.8V EP 13.5V L2203 CN2201

1 20
CN5601
CN5602 VDD
LCD902
1
EP 4.6V EP 2.8V
19 18
21 22
6 7
6 7
COLOR LCD UNIT
CN1008 SHOE UNREG 11 13 SHOE UNREG
CN1001
(1/2) (10/18) (10/18)
(1/2)
EP 4.6V EP 13.5V EP 2.8V BL REG BL CONT
4 2 17 40 16 18 20 EP 4.6V D 2.8V
IC2201
RGB DRIVE
IC2202
TIMING GENERATOR 8
16 5
IC6001 IC5601
BACK LIGHT DRIVE RGB DRIVE
IC6002
TIMING GENERATOR 14 POFF ND901 BACKLIGHT
(2/2)
IC6101,6102
BL CONT
23 17 5 5
20 19
1 2
INVERTER BACK LIGHT DRIVE
BL HIGH CN6101
10
BL REG
21 20
19 20
CN5202
CN6201
(15/18)
(15/18)
(16/18)
IC2301
AUDIO I/O MT 4.6V AU 4.6V AU 2.8V AU 4.6V AU 2.8V Q2307 REG SP VCC
IC2302
AUDIO D/A CONV. A/D CONV.
IC2401
MIC AMP
(11/18)
IC3001
(11/18)
55 57
ZM RST LED FC RST LED
IC3004
EEPROM
CAMERA CONTROL
44 38
D 2.8V D 1.5V
(13/18)
CAM DD ON 189
(13/18)
(13/18)
(14/18)
TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)(MD-097)
IC3203
HI CONTROL DIGITAL STILL CONTROL
IC3302
EEPROM
IC3202
XTAL OSC
IC3401
32Mbit FLASH MEMORY
(PAGE 3-10)
(7/18)
(4/18)
(6/18)
(5/18)
(5/18)
(4/18)
IC3801 IC3803
64Mbit SDRAM
IC3501
DVD SYSTEM CONTROL
IC3701
DVD CODEC
IC3601 IC3602
128Mbit SDRAM
IC3603
16Mbit FCRAM
IC3502
A 1.5V AUDIO PLL D 1.5V
FB3202 D2.8V D 3.1V 1.5V 3
(2/18)
A 2.8V A 1.5V D 1.5V D 3.1V D 2.5V D 2.8V MT 4.6V A 4.6V 32 34 36 50 52 54 56 26 22 24 28 30 19 21 46 48 L1101 MT 4.9V A 4.6V A 2.8V A 1.5V D 1.5V D 3.1V D 2.5V D 2.8V AU 2.8V L1403 D 2.8V D 1.5V CAMERA PROCESS A 2.8V
(2/18)
IC1401
IC1403
16Mbit SDRAM
(2/18)
IC1402
1.5V REG 2 CN1006 7 17 CN5503 16 6 D5503 NIGHT SHOT LED SE5501,5502 PITCH/YAW SENSOR LED
IC5501
REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER
MT 4.9V
R1005,1006
NS LED A
18
SE 2.8V
SE 2.8V
12
11
A 2.8V D 2.8V A 4.6V A 4.6V L1201 IMG VH IMG VL CAM DD ON 42
(1/18)
MA-420 BOARD CD-428 BOARD

CN1301 CAM 12V 2 CN5001 26
IC1301
TIMING GENERATOR
58 60
(16/18)
CN1003 FOR ADJUSTMENTS CN1004 FOR ADJUSTMENTS
(9/18)
(8/18)
(3/18)
(3/18)
Q1301,1302,1305 IMG VH 12V REG
IC5001
CCD IMAGER
IC1101
9 D 3.1V PITCH/ YAW SENSOR AMP D 3.1V
IC2001
VIDEO A/D CONV.
IC2101
VIDEO IN/OUT AGC ACC
IC1203
FOCUS/Z OOM/ IRIS/ND DRIVE
IC1201 IC1202
IRIS DRIVE
(1/18)
(1/18)
IMG VL
-6.5V REG
CAM -6.5V 1 Q1303,1304 27
IC1302
SH,AGC A/D CONV.
IC1303
FREQ TUNE AMP ZM RST LED
A 2.8V
A 2.8V CN FC RST LED
Q1202(1/2) ZM SENS VCC 17
ZOOM RESET SENSOR
LENS ASSY
FC SENS VCC 9 Q1202(2/2) CN1201 FOCUS RESET SENSOR
3-11
3-12
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
MD-097 BOARD (2/2)
(4/7) (4/7) (4/7)
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
BASE UNIT
IC4703 IC4704
ADDRESS LATCH
IC4702
FLASH MEMORY
IC4701
DVD DRIVE CONTOROL
87
137
XSKEW ON XSKEW RW INSW X INSW X XSKEW RW LDD VCC CN4501

8 9
84
LD DRIVE
(1/7)
PD VCC FB4702 D 2.8V A 2.5V D 2.5V D 3.1V D 1.5V FB4603 TILT LEDA A 2.8V Q4502 Q4504 TILT PDK
20
A 2.8V
IC4504
TILT PD AMP FDPD VCC
31
PD IC
39
FPD IC
TILT PD
19
(4/7)
(2/7)
(2/7)
(2/7)
(1/7)
TO POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)
IC4202
USB 2.0 BRIDGE
IC4601
DVD DSP
IC4603 IC4606
SELECTOR
IC4602
64Mbit SDRAM
IC4502
DVD RF PROCESS Q4801
CN4802 IN SW
2
IN LIMIT PD
(PAGE 3-10)
A 2.8V DRV MT 4.6V
6 12
SPINDLE MOTOR
WG1 A 2.5V WG1 D 2.5V A 2.8V DRV A 4.6V DRV MT 4.6V D 2.8V A 2.8V DRV A 4.6V DRV MT 4.6V A 2.8V DRV A 4.6V DRV MT 4.6V L4801 CN4803 SS VCC
1
CN5751
14 15
CN4909
(3/7)
(3/7)
(3/7)
(3/7)
(3/7)
(3/7)
(3/7)
(1/7)
M
DC FAN
IC5751 IC5752
SHOCK SENSOR AMP
IC4811
BUFFER AMP
IC4802
FOCUS DRIVE TRACKING DRIVE SLED MOTOR DRIVE
IC4801
SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE
IC4803
BUFFER
IC4804 IC4805
SKEW MOTOR DRIVE
IC4812
MMV
IC4813
OR GATE
IC4501
ROPC REF
SS-174 BOARD
3-13
3-14E
F A
COVER
G D
16
CN4001 6P CN5751 15P
15 A_2.8V A_2.8V SHOCKA_T SHOCKA_T SHOCKA_F SHOCKA_F REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND XSHK_T XSHK_T XSHK_F XSHK_F REG_GND REG_GND 6 BATT_UNREG 14 5 BATT_SIG 13 4 ACV_UNREG 12 3 ACV_GND 11 2 BATT_XEXT 10 1 BATT_GND CN4803 15P 9 A_2.8V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SHOCKA_T SHOCKA_F CN4904 REG_GND 10 XSHK_T 9 XSHK_F 8 REG_GND 7 VO3(-) (SKW1-) 6 VO3(-) (SKW1-) 5 VO4(-) (SKW2-) 10 11 12 13 14 15 4 VO4(-) (SKW2-) 3 VO3(+) (SKW1+) 2 VO3(+) (SKW1+) 1 VO4(+) (SKW2+) REG_GND VO4(+) (SKW2+) REG_GND USB_VCC USB_D+ USB_GND USB_DLANC_SIG XLANC_JACK_IN REG_GND LANC_DC 10P 8
BT-901 2 SS-174T BOARD 3 FP-608

FLEXIBLE
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/3)
BATTERY TERMINAL DC-IN USB LANC
SKEW MOTOR
SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1
CN4902 20P REG_GND 19 17 CN4802 15 13 11 9 7 5 Vrd MON9 3 1 20P (PD-C) INSW (PD-A) REG_GND REG_GND NC A_2.8V A3 (W) A2 A1 H1+ H1DRV_MT_4.6V CN4907 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 LID_OPEN REG_GND EJECT_SW PLG_VCC REG_GND D_2.8V ACCS_LED EJECT_LED 8P VH H2+ H2(V) (U) (HU+) (HU-) (H+) (H-) (HV+) (HV-) H3+ (HW+) H3(HW-) REG_GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 TEMP 19 NC 20 TEST_TE0 P97 HI_EVER_SCK HI_EVER_SO XCS_DD REG_GND PLCK 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 DSU/RXD3 TXD3 RXD0 TXD0 XHELIO_RESET TEST_FE0 TEST_RFOP JIG_UNREG TEST_RFON VTR_CAM_DD_ON INLIMIT_X
CPC
(FOR CHECK)
5 6
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
SPINDLE MOTOR
FP-609
FLEXIBLE
PLUNGER EJECT
1 2 DEW_AD REG_GND
CN4501
40P F+ CN4908 2P TT+ FF-GND LDD-LDEN1 LDD-XOUTEN3 CN4909 2 1 DRV_MT_4.6V A 2P LDD-VCC LDD-VCC LDD-GND LDD-GND LDD-OSCEN LDD-IIN3 LDD-IIN2 LDD-IIN1 LDD-XOUTEN2 MOD-C TILT-LEDK TILT-PDK TILT-LEDA TILT-PD2 TILT-PD1 G (PD-F) D (PD-B) C (PD-A) E (PD-H) F (PD-G) B (PD-D) A (PD-C) H (PD-E) PD-VCC PD-VC PD-GND PD-RFPD-RF+ PD-MODE FPD-GND FPDIC-VC FPD-VCC FPDIC-OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
MD-097 BOARD(1/2)
Since a service is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK ASSY(A-7111-651-A) and not for the single MD-097 board.
Replacement of IC4201,4502,4601 and IC4702 on the MD-097 board is not possible. Because the necessary adjustment or writing of data cannot be made locally.
DEW SENSOR DC FAN MOTOR
4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
MECHANISM DECK
9 10
RF BLOCK
11
4-2
CN4801 6P
12 13
GND GND VO4- (FMO2) VO3+ (FMOS1) VO4+ (FMO1) VO3- (FMOS2)
1 2 3 4 5 6
SLED MOTOR
14
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/3)
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
M
16

1
AUDIO/VIDEO MIC901 MIC UNIT
FP-611
FLEXIBLE
8 REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND VIDEO_I/O 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 GND 3 INT_MIC_L 2 GND 1
INT_MIC_R
AV_JACK_IN
AUDIO_L_I/O
AUDIO_R_I/O
CN1501 27 26 25 ZOOM-_P FOCUS+_P FOCUS-_P
27P
G Y
CN1009 8P
CN5501 4P
J5501
4-3
24 23 22 21 CN1006 22P 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Z_MR_VCC YS_LI I_HALL+_P REG_GND I_BIAS-_P SIRCS_SIG I_DRIVE+_P A_4.6V I_DRIVE-_P XS_JACK_IN I_HALL-_P S_REG_GND I_BIAS+_P S_Y_I/O S_REG_GND S_C_I/O 20 21 22 19 18 17 16 15 14 Z_MR_A_P YS_V 13 Z_MR_GND SE_2.8V 12 Z_MR_B_P PS_LI 11 ND_BIAS+_P PS_V 10 ND_HALL-_P REG_GND 9 ND_DRIVE-_P F_TALLY_LED 8 ND_DRIVE+_P AU_2.8V 7 ND_BIAS-_P NS_LED_K 6 ND_HALL+_P NS_LED_A 5 NT_SHOT_P MIC_GND 4 NS_GND INT_MIC_L 3 F_MR_B_P MIC_GND 2 F_MR_A_P INT_MIC_R 1 F_MR_VCC TEMP_P F_MR/TEMP_GND ZOOM+_P
G S VIDEO
CN5503 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 INT_MIC_R MIC_GND INT_MIC_L MIC_GND NS_LED_A NS_LED_K AU_2.8V F_TALLY_LED REG_GND PS_V PS_LI SE_2.8V YS_V YS_LI REG_GND SIRCS_SIG A_4.6V XS_JACK_IN S_REG_GND S_Y_I/O S_REG_GND S_C_I/O
22P
MA-420 BOARD
LENS
CN5201 EXT_MIC_L 6 5 4 3 2 1 GND KEY_AD2 KEY_AD3 KEY_AD4 KEY_AD5 XBATT_VIEW DIAL_A DIAL_B BATT_LI_3V BL_GND BL_GND BL_CONT EP_13.5V BL_REG BL_REG EP_4.6V EP_2.8V PANEL_B REG_GND PANEL_G PANEL_R REG_GND VG PSIG XRST_VTR VD_SCK XCS_LCD VD_SO PANEL_XVD CN5203 2P 1 SP(+) SP(-) 2 PANEL_XHD XHD_OUT REG_GND SP+ SP7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 KEY_AD2 KEY_AD3 KEY_AD4 KEY_AD5 XBATT_VIEW DIAL_A DIAL_B BATT_LI_3V BL_GND BL_GND BL_CONT EP_13.5V BL_REG BL_REG EP_4.6V EP_2.8V PANEL_B REG_GND PANEL_G PANEL_R REG_GND VG PSIG XRST_VTR VD_SCK XCS_LCD VD_SO PANEL_XVD PANEL_XHD XHD_OUT REG_GND SP+ SPGND KEY_AD1 6 34 KEY_AD1 N.C. HI_XRESET 5 35 HI_XRESET N.C. MIC_GND 4 36 MIC_GND PANEL_REV MIC_GND 3 37 MIC_GND PANEL_REV EXT_MIC_R 2 38 EXT_MIC_R 39P 1 39 CN1007 EXT_MIC_L 39P
FP-605
FLEXIBLE
5 6
CN5206 6P
FP-612
FLEXIBLE
CN5205 1 DIAL_A REG_GND DIAL_B REG_GND FOCUS EXPOSURE 2 3 4 5 6 6P
CN1010
2P REG_GND REG_GND 1 2 2 1
CN5102 REG_GND REG_GND
2P
CCD IMAGER
PANEL REVERSE
HARNESS
CN5101 CN1601 24P SHD SHP GND RG GND H1 H2 GND GND CCD_OUTCCD_OUT+ GND GND A_2.8V VSUB CSUB CLPDM V1 V4 V2 V3 GND CAM_15V CAM_-7.5V 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 SHD SHP GND GND RG GND H1 N.C. H2 GND GND CCD_OUTCCD_OUT+ GND GND A_2.8V VSUB CSUB CLPDM V1 V4 V2 V3 GND GND CAM_15V
27P
VC-307 BOARD(2/2)
FP-602
FLEXIBLE
CK-127 BOARD
CD-428 BOARD
FP-606
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (KP-CX5500)

SP901 SPEAKER EXT_MIC_R REG_GND EXT_MIC_L MIC_GND 6 1 5 2 4 3 3 4 CN5204 6P PANEL_XVD PANEL_XHD XHD_OUT XRST_VTR XCS_LCD
10
FLEXIBLE
11
CN5202 20P
27
CAM_-7.5V
PANEL_B
EP_13.3V
EP_4.75V
REG_GND
PANEL_R
PANEL_G
EP_2.8V
BL_CONT
FP-607
FLEXIBLE
20 19 18 17 5 6
KEY_AD2 2
KEY_AD1 1
BL_REG
VD_SCK
SE_GND
BL_GND
VD_SO
PSIG
12
VG
20
19
18
17
16 16
PV-018
15 14 13 12 11 VG PSIG VD_SO VD_SCK
15
14
13
12
11
10 10
HARNESS
8 9 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4-4
FB-220 BOARD
BL_REG
EP_2.8V
SE_GND
BL_GND
PANEL_B
13
KEY_AD2
KEY_AD1
PANEL_R
PANEL_G
BL_CONT
XCS_LCD
EP_4.75V
EP_13.3V
MIC_GND KEY_AD1_A 1
XHD_OUT
REG_GND
REG_GND
XRST_VTR
FP-610
FLEXIBLE
EXT_MIC_L REG_GND 2
EXT_MIC_R MIC_GND 3
PANEL_XVD
PANEL_XHD
CN6201
PD-188 BOARD
CN5301 6P CN5302 6P
TO VC-307 BOARD (1/2)
20P
14
CN6001
CN6101 10P CRext TEST1 TEST2 PSIG REF WIDE HCK2 HCK1 VST LED_GND
24P
EXT_MIC_L 4 5
BL_LOW
EXT_MIC_R
BL_HIGH
MIC_GND 6
HST
VVSSG
SOUT
VDOG
VCK
VSS
RGT
VDD
COM
LED
N.C 9 10
DWN 19
N.C 8
N.C 7
N.C 6
N.C 5
N.C 4
EN
CS
15
24
23
22
21
20
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
16
ND901 BACK LIGHT
SUPER NS/ COLOR SLOW S EXT_MIC
LCD901 2.5INCH COLOR LCD UNIT
17
K A D
(FOR ADJUSTMENT)
COVER
16
TO VC-307 BOARD (2/2)
FLASH JIG
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1 MD2 USB_VCC_ON
CN1008 CN4901 REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND SHOE_UNREG SHOE_UNREG BATT_LI_3V EP_13.5V MT_4.6V MT_4.6V VTR_UNREG BATT_UNREG 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 54 56 D_1.5V IMG_VH IMG_VL EJECT_RQ SCK_TO_HELIO XUSB_SEL EJECT_OK USB_STATUS XHELIO_RESET EVER_3.0V HD5 HD6 HD2 HD1 HD0 83 85 87 CN1002 14 13 12 11 10 XCAM_ON_SW XRHOTO_STBY_SW VTR_UNREG CHARGE_LED_ON POWER_LED POWER_VCC XS/S_SW D_2.8V ZOOM_AD REG_GND 1 CN2201 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 XVTR_ON_SW XPHOTO_FREEZE KEY_AD0 REG_GND 14P 89 91 93 95 97 99 HDRQ HWR_X HRD_X IORDY HDAK_X INTRQ HA1 HA0 HCS1_X HD7 HD8 HD9 HD10 HD11 HD12 HD13 HD14 HD15 HA2 HCS3_X 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 81 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 79 81 83 85 87 89 91 93 95 97 99 BATT/XEXT_SW BATT_SIG FAST_CHARGE INIT_CHARGE_ON VTR_DD_ON VC_IN XCS_DD HI_EVER_SO HI_EVER_SCK BATT_IN HI_XRESET XLANC_ON XLANC_PWR_ON LANC_IN LANC_OUT LANC_SIG LANC_DC XATA_RESET USB_XSTBY USB_DET20 EJECT_SW XRST_BRIDGE VOUT HD4 HD3 HD2 HD1 HD0 HDRQ HWR_X HRD_X IORDY HDAK_X INTRQ HA1 HA0 HCS1_X SHOE_ON BL_REG BL_REG BL_CONT D_2.5V D_2.5V D_3.1V D_2.8V D_2.8V A_2.8V A_2.8V A_2.8V AU_2.8V EP_2.8V EP_4.6V AU_4.6V A_4.6V A_4.6V A_1.5V D_1.5V D_1.5V 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 38 36 34 32 30 28 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 REG_GND 8 7 REG_GND 6 5 REG_GND 4 3 REG_GND 2 1 REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND SHOE_ON BL_REG BL_REG BL_CONT D_2.5V D_2.5V D_3.1V D_2.8V D_2.8V A_2.8V A_2.8V A_2.8V AU_2.8V EP_2.8V EP_4.6V AU_4.6V A_4.6V A_4.6V A_1.5V D_1.5V D_1.5V D_1.5V IMG_VH IMG_VL EJECT_RQ SCK_TO_HELIO XUSB_SEL EJECT_OK USB_STATUS XHELIO_RESET EVER_3.0V HD5 HD6 HD7 HD8 HD9 HD10 HD11 HD12 HD13 HD14 HD15 HA2 HCS3_X 1 REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND REG_GND SHOE_UNREG SHOE_UNREG BATT_LI_3V EP_13.5V MT_4.6V MT_4.6V VTR_UNREG BATT_UNREG BATT/XEXT_SW BATT_SIG FAST_CHARGE INIT_CHARGE_ON VTR_DD_ON VC_IN XCS_DD HI_EVER_SO HI_EVER_SCK BATT_IN HI_XRESET XLANC_ON XLANC_PWR_ON LANC_IN LANC_OUT LANC_SIG LANC_DC XATA_RESET USB_XSTBY USB_DET20 EJECT_SW XRST_BRIDGE VOUT HD4 HD3 3 CN1003 7 1 GND 9 2 GND 11 3 PANEL_VG 13 4 H_START 15 5 XHD/PSIG 17 6 EVF_VG 19 7 EVF_VCO 21 8 EVF_BL 23 9 D_3.1V 25 10 LANC_SIG 27 11 MS_XIN 29 12 MS_DIO 31 13 MS_BS 33 14 MS_VCC_ON 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 65 67 69 71 73 75 77 79 MS_SCLK ACCESS_LED C_PIO5 C_PIO4 S_TXD S_RXD 15 16 17 18 19 20 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98 100 32 30 28 CPC 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 20P 5 100P
2 XINIT D_3.1V USB_DUSB_D+ AVCC_LK REG_GND USB_DET11 REC_CRRT1 REC_CRRT0 MC_FLASH_SI MC_FLASH_SO XCS_MC_FLASH MC_FLASH_SCK CN1004 16P
100P 2 4 6 8
REG_GND
3 4
Replacement of IC4201,4502,4601 and IC4702 on the MD-097 board is not possible. Because the necessary adjustment or writing of data cannot be made locally.
4-5
(FOR CHECK)
5 6
MD-097 BOARD(2/2)
Board TO Board
VC-307 BOARD(1/2)
CN1001 1 SHOE_UNREG SHOE_UNREG LANC_SIG SHOE_ID1 SHOE_ID2 EXT_STROBO SHOE_MIC_GND SHOE_MIC_L SHOE_UNREG_GND SHOE_UNREG_GND 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
10P
FP-604
FLEXIBLE
INTELLIGENT ACCESSORY SHOE CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-CX5500)

EVF_GND EVF_VDD 1 20 2 19 EVF_VCC EVF_GND CN5602 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 COM VG VR VB 16P BLK HCK1 HCK2 HST 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RGT DWN EN STB VCK VST VSS VDD XTALLY_LED COM VB LED_ON/OFF HCK2 HST EN EVF_GND HCK1 VCK VST 3 18 VST 4 17 VCK VR BLK STB 5 16 STB VG
9 10
20P
11
EP_4.6V
LED_DA
D_2.8V
FP-603
15 EN 14 HST
FLEXIBLE
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
8 13 HCK2
9 12 HCK1
12
11 BLK
10 VB
VR
VG
COM
D_2.8V
LED_DA
EVF_4.6V
EVF_GND
LED_ON/OFF
XTALLY_LED
CN5601 20P
13
4-6 FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (3/3)
LB-084 BOARD
14
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER

Link
CD-428 BOARD (CCD IMAGER) FP-609 FLEXIBLE PD-188 BOARD (1/2) (LCD DRIVE) PD-188 BOARD (2/2) (BACKLIGHT DRIVE) LB-084 BOARD
(EVF CONNECTOR, EVF BACK LIGHT)
CK-127 BOARD (CONNECTOR, FUNCTION SWITCH) FB-220 BOARD (FUNCTION SWITCH) FP-610 FLEXIBLE (EXT MIC) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (KP-CX5500) CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PS-CX5500) FP-611 FLEXIBLE (AUDIO/VIDEO JACK)
FP-608 FLEXIBLE (USB, LANC) MA-420 BOARD

(PITCH/YAW SENSOR, REMOTE SEONSOR, MIC)
COMMON NOTE FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
WAVEFORMS
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For schematic diagrams) All capacitors are in F unless otherwise noted. pF : Link V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics F. 50 and tantalums. Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted. k=1000 , M=1000 k. Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat. Some chip part will be indicated as follows. Example C541 L452 22U 10UH TA A 2520 Kinds of capacitor Temperature characteristics External dimensions (mm) Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX indicate that they are not used. In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated. Parts with * differ according to the model/destination. Refer to the mount table for each function. All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted. Signal name XEDIT EDIT PB/XREC PB/REC 2: non flammable resistor 5: fusible resistor C: panel designation A: B+ Line B: B Line J : IN/OUT direction of (+,) B LINE. C: adjustment for repair. A: VIDEO SIGNAL (ANALOG) A: AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG) A: VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL A: VIDEO/AUDIO/SERVO SIGNAL A: SERVO SIGNAL Circled numbers refer to waveforms. (Measuring conditions voltage and waveform) Voltages and waveforms are measured between the measurement points and ground when camera shoots color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values and reference waveforms. (VOM of DC 10 M input impedance is used) Voltage values change depending upon input impedance of VOM used.) 1. Connection
Pattern box
1.5 m
Front of the lens
2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain.
Yellow
H
Cyan Green
White Magenta
A B
A=B
Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)
When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name.
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Note : Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.
4-9
Red Blue
B A
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
COVER

For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4-83 for printed wiring board of CD-428 board. Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board of FP-609 board. Refer to page 4-105 for waveforms of CD-428 board.
CD-428 BOARD
FP-609 FLEXIBLE BOARD
1 CD-428 BOARD A
CCD IMAGER
XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE R :REC MODE P :PB MODE
4 SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA REC PB Y
7
CN5001 1 2 GND GND GND GND RG GND H1 NC H2 GND GND GND CCD_OUT GND GND GND VSHT V_DRAIN GND V1 V4 V2 V3 GND GND CAM_12V CAM_-6.5V 27P
FP-609 FLEXIBLE A
REG_GND PLG_VCC TO MD-097 BOARD (6/7) CN4907 EJECT_SW REG_GND LID_OPEN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 R9051 100 D9051 CL-165HR/YG-D-T (ACCESS/OPEN) R9052 390 S9053 OPEN S9052 , S9051 (LID OPEN) RY9501 PLANGER
Y/CHROMA
RG
3 4 5 6 H1 7 8 H2 9 10 11 12 13 14
TO VC-307 BOARD (1/18) CN1301 FP-606 FLEXIBLE (THROUGH THE )
(PAGE 4-38 of LEVEL3)
D_2.8V ACCS_LED EJECT_LED
ICX220BK-13 (DVD100) ICX221BK-13 (DVD100E) R-6.4 P0 V4
R-6.4 P0
R-0.3 P0
R-0.3 P0
15
R9.1 P0 R12.0 P0
16 7 C5003 0.01u B
VDD
2
V3
3
V2
4
V1
5
V_HOLD
6
V_DRAIN
L5001 220uH C5004 10u 20V TA B
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
IC5001
CCD IMAGER
C
16
2 5
SUB H2 H1
IC5001
3
CCD_OUT
4
GND RG
R-6.8 P0.4
R8.6 P0
R1.4 P0
R1.7 P0
R10.3 P0
R8.5 P0
*Pin number and index mark of IC5001 are shown as viewed from the bottom.
Q5001 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 BUFFER
VL
14
13
12
11
10
R12.0 P0
26 27
C5005 0.01u B C5001 22u 10V TA A L5002 10uH
C5002 10p CH
R7.7 P0 R5001 8200 RG R5002 XX LN5001 GND
C5006 0.01u B
R5003 XX
FB5002 0uH H1 H2 CN5002 2 1 2P TO VC-307 BOARD (17/18) CN1010
REG_GND REG_GND
Precautions Upon Replacing CCD imager
F
16
The CD-428 board mounted as a repair part is not equipped with a CCD imager. When replacing this board, remove the CCD imager from the old one and mount it onto the new one. If the CCD imager has been replaced, carry out all the adjustments for the camera section. As the CCD imager may be damaged by static electricity from its structure, handle it carefully like for the MOS IC. In addition, ensure that the receiver is not covered with dusts nor exposed to strong light.
4-11
4-12
CD-428/FP-609
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
COVER
For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4-85 for printed wiring board. Refer to page 4-106 for waveforms.
PD-188 PRINTED WIRING BOARD
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
PD-188 BOARD(1/2) A
LCD DRIVE(RGB/TG BLOCK)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
CN6201 BL_GND SE_GND EP_13.3V BL_REG 20P BL_GND 1 SE_GND 2 3 BL_REG 4
0 13.5
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
BGP
FB6002
0uH C6009 1u 25V TA C6010 0.01u B
PFRP
PRG
BLK
FRP
C6006 XX
R6005 XX
VP
1.9
2.7
2.8
1.4
1.4
2.8
7.0
B
TO CK-127 BOARD CN5202
EP_4.75V EP_4.75V EP_2.8V REG_GND PANEL_B 6 7
36
N.C.
35
EXT_DA
34
N.C
33
BGP
BL_CONT
32
BLACK_IN
31
PRG
30
FRP
29
PFRP
28
XVP.SAVE
27
VP
3.3
BL_CONT
C6014 1u B
26
P_DC_DET
25
Vcc2
8 PANEL_B 9 PANEL_G 10 PANEL_R

37
VG VR VB VP
( C
THROUGH THE PV-018 HARNESS
13.5
Q6004 2SA207800LS0 SWITCH 13.4 C6021 XX B
PANEL_G PANEL_R VG PSIG XRST_VTR VD_SCK XCS_LCD VD_SO PANEL_XVD PANEL_XHD XHD_OUT
24
(PAGE 4-21)
11 VG 12 PSIG 13 XRST_VTR 14 VD_SCK 15 XCS_LCD 16 VD_SO 17 PANEL_XVD 18 PANEL_XHD 19 XHD_OUT 20 C6001 4.7u B C6002 10u 6.3V A L6001 10uH R6002 470k XCS_LCD XTG_SO VD_SCK1 XC.SAVE
0 2.8 2.7 2.6 2.8 2.8 2.8 1.2 R6001 68k XP.SAVE 2.8 1.7 C6003 C6004 C6005 0.01u 0.01u 0.01u 1.7 1.7
3
VB B_DC_DET
23
7.0 2.9 7.0 3.1 7.0 2.9 C6018 1u B C6017 1u B C6016 1u B
VB R6017 47k 12.7
N.C. XC.SAVE XSCK SI XCS Vcc1 TRAP_ADJ LPF_ADJ XP.SAVE B_IN G_IN R_IN
XSH.SAVE
38
2 IC6001
RGB DRIVE IC6001 CXA3289BR-T4
VG RB6001 100X4 VR TG14 R6016 1k C6020 XX
39
VG G_DC_DET
22
R6018 12k D6002 XX 0.1 2.7
40
41
VR R_DC_DET GND2 GND1
42
19
20
21
D
REG_GND BL_GND BL_GND SE_GND BL_REG EP_4.75V SE_GND PANEL_G BL_REG EP_4.75V BL_CONT PANEL_R PANEL_B
Q6003 UNR32A300LS0 SWITCH
43
44
17
18
RB6002 XX C6019 4.7u B

16 13 14 15
45
4 5 6
COM_DC OP_OUT OP_IN+
VREF Vcc3 COM_OUT COM_IN
48
47
46
13.5
OP_IN-
E 1
(2/2)
BL_CONT
R6021 150k
SH_R SH_G SH_B SH_A BIAS GND VCO
C6024 0.1u B CN6001 24 23 24P LCD901
TEST1 COM VST VCK EN DWN VDD VSS VDOG VVSSG CS WIDE HST REF SOUT CRext HCK2 HCK1 PSIG G R B RGT TEST2 2.5 INCH COLOR LCD UNIT
1
0.9 2.8
2
2.8
3
0.9
4
0.9
6
1.4
7
1.4
8
1.4
10
1.4
11
2.9
12
6.7
TG24 TG23 TG22 TG21 C6012 0.1u B
22 21 20 19 C6023 1u B D6003 RD3.3UM-T1B 18 17 16
SH1
SH2
SH3
SH4
R6006 2700
C6011 560p
F
FB6001 0uH EP_2.8V
R6009 68k R6007 47k R6010 22k
R6013 100k
D6001 1SV290(TPL3)
R6012 1M R6011 68k C6013 0.001u B L6002 6.8uH
15 14
C6015 68p
TG20 TG18
13 12 11
VG 10
XC.SAVE XP.SAVE
G
SH1 SH2 SH3 SH4
9 TG17 TG16 8 7 6 5 4 3 Q6002 HN1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) R6015 10k 7.6 4 5 2.6 2.8 0.1 2.8 7.0 HST HCK2 HCK1 RGT POFF
18
XRST_VTR R6003 1k C6007 0.1u
2.8
0.9
2.8
0.9
0.9
2.8
1.4
2.8
1.4
1.4
36
XCLR
35
SHR
34
SHG
33
SHB
32
SHA
31
VSS
30
TEST
29
RPD
28
XC.SAVE
27
OSCI
26
OSCO
2.8
25
XSTBY
TG15
H
37
2 1 R6022 820k 1.6 1.0
XCLP PRG SBLK FRP PFRP XSCK VDD XCS SO SI VDO XVD
VST VCK EN DWN WIDE VDD
24
BGP PRG BLK FRP
2.7 2.8 0 1.4 1.4 2.7 C6008 0.01u B 2.8 2.8 2.6 2.7
0 1.4
TG24 TG23 TG22 TG21 TG20 Q6001,6002 PSIG DRIVE R6014 10k 6.5 1 TG18 TG17 13.4 TG16 2 6 4 3
13.4 6 2 7.6 3 1 7.0
R6019 1M
38
23
39
40
21
22
7.0
C6022 0.1u B
R6020 68k
41
42
43
IC6002 CXD3512R-T4
19
VD_SCK1
TIMING GENERATOR
20
PFRP
IC6002
Q6005 2SA207800LS0 LEVEL SHIFT
0 1.4 1.4 2.8 2.8
6.5
44
17
XCS_LCD XTG_SO VD_SO
7.0
Q6001 HN1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)
45
16
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA REC PB Y Y/CHROMA
46
15
TG15 TG14
47
48
TSTEN
DETIN
XWRT
PWM
TST0
TEST
TEST
PANEL_XHD 1 PANEL_XVD VD_SO VD_SCK XCS_LCD R6023 0 VD_SCK1 PANEL_XHD XHD_OUT DAC BL_ON R6008 47k PSIG LED DETIN 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
TEST
XHD_OUT
BL_ON
7
HDO HD
GND
LED
13
PANEL_XVD
R6004 1k
2.7
14
(2/2)
L
16
PD-188 (1/2)
4-13
4-14
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4-85 for printed wiring board. Refer to page 4-106 for waveforms.
PD-188 PRINTED WIRING BOARD
PD-188 BOARD(2/2) A
BACKLIGHT DRIVE(BL BLOCK)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
L6101 82uH BL_REG R6106 1800 1/10W T6101 INVERTER TRANSFORMER
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
BL_GND
5 1 2 C6103 0.015u B 4.2 4.2 5 1 4 3 2 -0.4 Q6102 CPH5504-TL-E BACK LIGHT DRIVE 4 10 3 6 C6105 12p 3.15kV
CN6101 10 9 8
10P
BL_HIGH N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C BL_LOW LED LED_GND ND901 BACKLIGHT
C
EP_4.75V
-0.4 C6101 4.7u B
Q6103 XX
7 6 5 4
1 D
IC6102
(1/2) EP_2.8V IC6102 TA75S393F-TE85R 2.8 R6104 180k 0.4 0 CURRENT DET
Q6104 RN4983FE SWITCH 4.6 6 2 3
-0.6
R6109 100
3 2 1
5 4.6 1 4 D6103 4.7 MA111-(K8).S0
D6104 PG1111R-TR (STARTER)
2.8
VCC
1.9
R6101 XX LN6101 CH_GND D6101 XX
(SB T8711)
R6105 22k
C6102 XX
R6108 22k
C6104 0.1u B
R6110 470
E
R6102 XX SE_GND D6102 XX BL_CONT R6103 10k 1.9 0 IC6101 TC7W53FU(TE12R) DETIN
VCC COM CH0 INH CH1 VEE A GND
2.8 1.9
R6107 10k
IC1601
SWITCH DAC
F
2.8 REG_GND Q6101 UNR32A300LS0 INV.
2.8
2
LED
(1/2)
BL_ON
CN6202 TP_TOP TP_BOT TP_L TP_R
XX 1 2 3 4 D6201 XX
CN6203 TP_R
XX 1 2 3 4 5 6
H
16
TP_L NC TP_BOT TP_TOP NC
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.
Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.
4-15
4-16
PD-188 (2/2)
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4-87 for printed wiring board of LB-084 board. Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board of FP-608 board.
LB-084 BOARD
1 LB-084 BOARD A
1
USB,LANC
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
FP-608 FLEXIBLE A
D5602 NSCW455T-TC9 (BACK LIGHT)
TO MD-097 BOARD (5/7) CN4904
EVF CONNECTOR,EVF BACK LIGHT

XX MARK:NO MOUNT NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
LN9011 REG_GND REG_GND USB_VCC USB_D+ USB_GND USB_DLANC_SIG XLANC_JACK_IN 1 LN9010 2 LN9009 3 LN9008 4 LN9007 5 LN9006 6 LN9005 7 LN9004 8 LN9003 9 LN9002 LANC_DC 10 R9001 XX
5P 1 2 3 4 5 VCC CN9001 DD+ ID USB_GND (USB)
IC5601
BACK LIGHT DRIVE R5605 1800
R5606 33k
B
D5601 XX R5602 XX
R5603 180k 0.5%
IC5601 NJM2125F(TE2) 0.4
B
4.7 1.1 4 0.4 6 2 3 1 0.4 R5607 39 0.5% 1.1 Q5602 HN1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) BACK LIGHT DRIVE 5 1.4
VCC
0.4
REG_GND
R5604 39k 0.5%
3 2 5 1 4 R9003 0
J9001 (LANC)
CN5601 EVF_4.6V D_2.8V LED_DA XTALLY_LED LED_ON/OFF EVF_GND COM
20P 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
C5601 0.1u
LND9001 CH_GND
R9002 0
CN5602 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 C5602 2.2u F 1 COM VG VR VB BLK
16P
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA AUDIO SIGNAL
TO VC-307 BOARD (10/18) CN2201 THROUGH THE FP-603 FLEXIBLE
VG VR VB BLK HCK1 HCK2 HST EN
D
16
REC PB
HCK1 HCK2 HST RGT DWN EN STB VCK VST VSS VDD
STB VCK VST EVF_GND EVF_VCC
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA REC PB Y Y/CHROMA
G
16
LB-084/FP-608
4-17
4-18
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4-89 for printed wiring board.
MA-420 PRINTED WIRING BOARD
1 MA-420 BOARD A
10
PITCH/YAW SENSOR,REMOTE SENSOR,MIC

XX MARK:NO MOUNT
R5505 0 LN5501 CH_GND VD5501 VD5502
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R5502 0
S_C_I/O XS_JACK_IN
J5501 S VIDEO
IC5501
REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER R5504 47 IC5501 SBX3055-01 3 VCC GND 1 C5503 10u 6.3V TA S_C_I/O D5504 MA111-(K8).S0 S_Y_I/O 1 2 3 4 XS_JACK_IN 5 XS_JACK_IN A_4.6V SIRCS_SIG REG_GND YS_LI YS_V SE_2.8V PS_LI PS_V REG_GND F_TALLY_LED AU_2.8V NS_LED_K NS_LED_A MIC_GND INT_MIC_L MIC_GND INT_MIC_R TO VC-307 BOARD (18/18) CN1006 S_C_I/O S_REG_GND S_Y_I/O S_REG_GND
4.5 4.5
R5503 0
Y G
S_Y_I/O
D5501 UDZSTE-178.2B
4 OUT GND
C
FB5501 FB5504 0uH 0uH
CN5503
22P
R5501 0 1 2 Vout
6 7 8 9
C5501 XX
C5502 XX
Vref SE5501 YAW SENSOR GND 3
Vcc 4
R5507 0
10 LN5502 CH_GND 12 13 14 11
(THROUGH THE ) FP-605 FLEXIBLE

FB5502
0uH 0uH D5507 SML-310LTT86 (RECORDING)
R5506 680
15 16 17 18 19
E
1 Vref SE5502 PITCH SENSOR GND 3 Vcc 4 2 Vout
FB5503
20 21 R5508 0 D5502 XX 22
SIGNAL PATH F
REC PB VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA
D5503 CL-330IRS-X-TU CN5501 1 2 3 4 4P
MIC901 MIC UNIT INT_MIC_R GND INT_MIC_L GND MIC L MIC R
AUDIO SIGNAL
Infrared (ray emitter )
G
16
4-19
4-20
MA-420
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4-91 for printed wiring board.
CK-127 PRINTED WIRING BOARD
10
11
12
13
14
15
CK-127 BOARD A
CONNECTOR,FUNCTION SWITCH
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
XX KEY_AD1 KEY_AD2 REG_GND EXT_MIC_R 6P 1 KEY_AD2 2 3 EXT_MIC_R 4 EXT_MIC_L 5 MIC_GND MIC_GND 6 R5226 0 KEY_AD1 KEY_AD2 TO FB-220 BOARD CN5301 THROUGH THE FP-607 FLEXIBLE KEY_AD2 REG_GND EXT_MIC_R EXT_MIC_L MIC_GND 2 3 EXT_MIC_R 4 EXT_MIC_L 5 MIC_GND 6 4 B2 S5209 CN5201 EXT_MIC_L EXT_MIC_R MIC_GND 39P EXT_MIC_L 1 EXT_MIC_R 2 MIC_GND 3 4 HI_XRESET HI_XRESET KEY_AD1 KEY_AD2 KEY_AD3 KEY_AD4 KEY_AD5 XBATT_VIEW 5 KEY_AD1 6 KEY_AD2 7 KEY_AD3 8 KEY_AD4 9 KEY_AD5 10 XBATT_VIEW 11 12 KEY_AD5 DIAL_B BATT_LI_3V BL_GND BL_GND TO VC-307 BOARD (17/18) CN1007 BL_CONT EP_13.5V BL_REG BL_REG EP_4.6V EP_2.8V PANEL_B REG_GND PANEL_G PANEL_R REG_GND 13 14 BL_GND 15 SE_GND 16 BL_CONT 17 EP_13.5V 18 BL_REG 19 20 EP_4.6V 21 EP_2.8V 22 PANEL_B 23 24 PANEL_G 25 PANEL_R 26 27 28 29 30 VD_SCK VD_SCK XCS_LCD VD_SO PANEL_XVD PANEL_XHD 31 XCS_LCD 32 VD_SO 33 PANEL_XVD 34 PANEL_XHD 35 XHD_OUT XHD_OUT REG_GND SP+ SP36 37 38 39
3 3
CN5205 1 2 KEY_AD1 3 4 5 6 S5208 XX

1 2 1 2
6P
DIAL_A REG_GND DIAL_B REG_GND FOCUS EXPOSURE TO CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (KP-CX5500)
(PAGE 4-25)
EXT_MIC_L
CN5204 KEY_AD1
6P 1
KEY_AD3
( C
(PAGE 4-23)
B1 2
A1 1
B1 2
A1 1
B1 2
A1 1
S5207 PANEL_CLOSE
D5209 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
D5204 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
3 A2
4 B2 S5210 SETUP
3 A2
4 B2 S5211
3 A2
VISUAL INDEX
REC
KEY_AD4 B1 2
R5207 1200
R5211 1500
R5215 2200
R5218 3900
R5222 8200
R5206 1200
R5210 1500
R5223 2200
R5224 3900
R5225 8200
CN5206 6
6P
6P LD9206 PANEL_REV PANEL_REV N.C. N.C. GND GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 LD9201 S9201 (PANEL REVERSE)
PANEL_REV PANEL_REV N.C. N.C. GND GND
MIC_GND
A1 1
B1 2
A1 1
B1 2
A1 1
B1 2
A1 1
B1 2
A1 1
5 4 3
4 B2 S5212 (UP)
3 A2
4 B2 S5213
3 A2
4 B2 S5214
3 A2
4 B2 S5215 (RIGHT)
3 A2
4 B2 S5216 (DOWN)
3 A2
2 1
(LEFT)
ENTER
DIAL_A
R5208 1200 A1 1
R5212 1500 A1 1 A1 1
FP-612
B1 2
FLEXIBLE
D5201 XX
C5202 XX
B1 2
B1 2
4 B2 C5203 XX BT5201 LITHIUM BATTERY (SECONDARY) S5201 EDIT
3 A2
4 B2 S5204 VOL+
3 A2
4 B2 S5205 VOL-
3 A2
THROUGH THE FP-602 FLEXIBLE
D5202 XX
XBATT_VIEW
B1 2
A1 1
VG PSIG XRST_VTR
C5201 XX R5201 0
VG PSIG XRST_VTR
4 B2
S5206
3 A2
DISPLAY/ BATT INFO
HI_XRESET R5204 1k
2 1 1 2
A1 1 D5208 UDZSTE-178.2B B1 2
D5205 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
D5207 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
4 B2 S5203 RESET
3 A2 LD5202 CH GND CN5203 1 2P SP901 SPEAKER
SP(+) SP(-)
CN5202
20P 1
2
2
BL_GND SE_GND EP_13.3V BL_REG BL_CONT EP_4.75V EP_2.8V TO PD-188 BOARD (1/2) CN6201 REG_GND PANEL_B PANEL_G PANEL_R VG PSIG XRST_VTR VD_SCK XCS_LCD
SE_GND 2 EP_13.5V 3 BL_REG 4 BL_CONT 5 EP_4.6V 6 EP_2.8V 7 8 PANEL_B 9 PANEL_G 10 PANEL_R 11 VG 12 PSIG 13 XRST_VTR 14 R5227 15 XCS_LCD 16 VD_SO VD_SO PANEL_XVD 17 PANEL_XVD 18 PANEL_XHD 19 XHD_OUT XHD_OUT 20 PANEL_XHD 470 VD_SCK
3
BL_GND
D5203 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
LD5201 CH GND
J (
THROUGH THE PV-018 HARNESS
(PAGE 4-13)
CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA REC PB Y Y/CHROMA AUDIO SIGNAL
K
16
CK-127
4-21
4-22
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4-87 for printed wiring board of FB-220 board. Refer to page 4-93 for printed wiring board of FP-610 flexible board.
FB-220 BOARD
1 FB-220 BOARD A
FUNCTION SWITCH
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
6
KEY_AD1
7
R5301 1200 B1 2 A1 1 B1 2
8
R5303 1500 A1 1 B1 2 R5305 2200 A1 1
10
4 B2 S5301 BACK LIGHT
3 A2
4 B2 S5303 FADER
3 A2
4 B2 S5305 REVIEW
3 A2
KEY_AD2 B1 2
R5302 1200 A1 1 B1 2
R5304 1500 A1 1 B1 2
R5306 2200 A1 1 B1 2
R5308 3900 A1 1 B1 2 A1 1
4 B2
3 A2 S5302 STOP
4 B2 S5304 PREV
3 A2
4 B2 S5306
3 A2
4 B2 S5308 NEXT
3 A2
4 B2 S5310 PAUSE
3 A2
D5301 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
PLAY (PLAY BACK)
LD5301 CH GND
FP-610
FLEXIBLE
J9101 6P 6 FB9101 FB9102 0uH 0uH 5 4 3 2 S9101 SUPER NS/ COLOR SLOW S 1 MIC_GND EXT_MIC_L EXT_MIC_R MIC_GND REG_GND KEY_AD1_A CN5302 MIC_GND EXT_MIC_L EXT_MIC_R MIC_GND REG_GND KEY_AD1_A
C5301 0.01u B 6P 6 5 4 3 2 1
VD5301
VD5302
MIC (PLUG IN POWER)
R5309 0
R5310 0
CN5301 TO CK-127 BOARD CN5204 FP-607 FLEXIBLE (THROUGH THE ) KEY_AD1 KEY_AD2 REG_GND EXT_MIC_R EXT_MIC_L MIC_GND
6P 6
SIGNAL PATH
KEY_AD1 KEY_AD2 5 4 3 2 1
AUDIO SIGNAL REC PB
(PAGE 4-21)
F
16
4-23
4-24
FB-220/FP-610
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(KP-CX5500) A

FUNCTION SWITCH
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(PS-CX5500) A

FUNCTION SWITCH
RV001
CHASSIS GND S002 EXPOSURE

T
POWER ZOOM 14P LND001 1 LND002 2 ZOOM_AD D_2.8V XS/S_SW POWER_VCC POWER_LED CHARGE_LED_ON VTR_UNREG XRHOTO_STBY_SW XCAM_ON_SW XVTR_ON_SW XPHOTO_FREEZE KEY_AD0 REG_GND TO VC-307 BOARD (17/18) CN1002 LND003 3 LND004 W D002 POWER LND005 5 LND006 6 LND007 7 LND008 CHG D001 TLOU1008(T05,SOY) 8 LND009 9 LND010 10 LND011 11 LND012 12 LND013 (MOVIE) (PLAY/EDIT) (STILL) LND014 14 13 4 REG_GND
S003 FOCUS
B
6P 6 LND005 5 LND004 4 REG_GND DIAL_B REG_GND DIAL_A LND003 FOCUS TO CK-127 BOARD CN5205
S004 MODE
LND006
EXPOSURE
S001 ADJUSTMENT NEAR+ FARLND002 LND001
3 2 1
(PAGE 4-22)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(KP-CX5500) is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
D
16
D
S007 POWER ON OFF(CHG)
E
S003 START/STOP
S001
PHOTO(FREEZE)
S002 PHOTO(REC)
LND015 CHASSIS GND
G
16
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(PS-CX5500) is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
KP-CX5500/PS-CX5500
4-25
4-26
Schematic diagram of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 boards are not shown. Pages from 4-27 to 4-78 are not shown.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4-94 for printed wiring board of FP-611 flexible board.
1
AUDIO/VIDEO JACK
FP-611 FLEXIBLE A
8P REG_GND VIDEO_I/O TO VC-307 BOARD (17/18) CN1009 AV_JACK_IN REG_GND AUDIO_R_I/O REG_GND AUDIO_L_I/O REG_GND 1
LD9151 LD9152 2 LD9153 3 LD9154 4 LD9155 5 LD9156 6 LD9157 7 LD9158 8 D9151 01ZA8.2(TPL3) D9152 01ZA8.2(TPL3)
FB9152 0uH FB9153 0uH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J9151 AUDIO/VIDEO
FB9151 0uH
LD9151 CH_GND
C SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA Y Y/CHROMA AUDIO SIGNAL
D
16
REC PB
FP-611
4-79
4-80
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER

Link
CD-428 BOARD PD-188 BOARD LB-084 BOARD FB-220 BOARD MA-420 BOARD CK-127 BOARD FP-612 FLEXIBLE BOARD FP-608/609/610/611 FLEXIBLE BOARD
COMMON NOTE FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
WAVEFORMS FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS (In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards) : Uses unleaded solder. : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. (The other layers patterns are not indicated) Through hole is omitted. Circled numbers refer to waveforms. There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram isnt mounted in this model. C: panel designation
Chip parts. Transistor

C 6 5 4 4 5 6 5 4 4 5
Diode
3 3 3 1 23
1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 4 5 4
2 1
1 2 2 3
1 2 4 4
1 6 54 3 3 4
5 4 3 3 4 5 2
1 1 2 3
4 5
3 2 4
1 1
BOARD INFORMATION board name CD-428 PD-188 LB-084 FB-220 MA-420 CK-127 SS-174T MD-097 parts location 4-108 4-108 4-108 4-108 4-109 4-109 4-112 4-110 waveform 4-105 4-105 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 8 pattern 2 to 7 2 to 7 IC4602 IC1401, 1403, 2001, 3001, 3103, 3203, 3401, 3403, 3501, 3601, 3602, 3603, 3701, 3801, 3803 CSP IC (shown on page) (shown on page) number of layers layers not shown
VC-307
4-111
4-106
2 to 7
4-81
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
CD-428 (CCD IMAGER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
Refer to page 4-81 for common note for printed wiring board.
MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION
: Uses unleaded solder.
CD-428 BOARD(SIDE A)
CD-428 BOARD(SIDE B)
7
C5004 R5002 LN5001 C5003
2
IC5001
C5001 B
L5002
+ L5001
B
14
C5006
C5005
10
5
R5003
C5002
Q5001
R5001
FB5002
CN5002 1 2 27 25
15
CN5001
26
20
10
D
1-689-38816
D
11
16
11
1-689-388-
4-83
4-84
CD-428
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
PD-188 (LCD DRIVE, BACKLIGHT DRIVE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

PD-188 BOARD
LN6101
D6101
35
R6102 R6101 C6006
C6014
FB6002
D6102
R6005
C6009 C6010
30
36 37
25 24
3 2
3
A
Q6102
RB6001 C6016 C6017 C6018 RB6002 R6106 C6103
R6023
C6002
R6002
C6001
40
R6001
C6003
4
45 48
IC6001
5 6
13 12 5
R6009
R6012
20
1
15
C6004
L6001
5
C6019
C6005
1 10
R6010
C6011
C6012
L6101
R6003
R6006 R6007 R6004
T6101
B
CN6201
10
9
45
R6011 C6008 C6007
Q6003
FB6001
48 1
37
R6013
6 K D6001 A
C6101
10
R6008
R6018
40 35
36
Q6004
C6020
C6021
15
R6017
IC6002
8
C6013
30
R6104 L6002
C6015
5 1 2
4 3
D6002
Q6005
R6019
R6016
IC6102
R6110
10
R6014
20
D6003
3 R6022 R6021
C6024
IC6101
Q6104
C6023
R6020 R6015 1
Q6001 Q6002
12 13
20 24
R6103
15
C6102 1 8 R6105
R6108 C6105
25
Q6101
R6107
C6104
D6103
R6109
C6022
10
10
15
20
24
CN6001
CN6101
D
D6104
1-687-542-
11
16
PD-188
4-85
4-86
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
LB-084 (EVF CONNECTOR, EVF BACK LIGHT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD FB-220 (FUNCTION SWITCH) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
LB-084 BOARD(SIDE A)
LB-084 BOARD(SIDE B)
K A D5601
ID5602
19
15
ID5601
ID5603
20
10 CN5601
R5602
R5603
R5606
D5602
10 CN5602
1516
R5607
LF5601
HF5601
3 2 1
C
1-689-392- 11
IC5601 4 5
R5604
C5601
R5605
Q5602
C5602
C
11
1-689-392-
16
1
FB-220 BOARD(SIDE A)
16
FB-220 BOARD(SIDE B)
A
R5305
A
S5301 BACK LIGHT S5303 FADER S5305 REVIEW
R5303
CN5302
R5301 65 1
D5301
R5309 C5301 R5310

R5308 R5306 R5304 R5302
S5306
S5310
S5302
S5304 S5308 > (NEXT)
LD5301
56
VD5302 VD5301
B PLAY (PLAYBACK)
X PAUSE
x STOP
. PREV
CN5301
B
1-689-39111
1-689-39116
11
16
4-87
4-88
LB-084/FB-220
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER

MA-420 (PITCH/YAW SENSOR, REMOTE SENSOR, MIC) PRINTED WIRING BOARD
MA-420 BOARD(SIDE A)
A
MA-420 BOARD(SIDE B)
A
LN5502 R5507
FB5504
20
15 CN5503
R5501 +
SE5501
C
R5504 R5508 C5503 + P
10
C5501
C5502
21
FB5501
22
(YAW SENSOR)
C
A
FB5503
R5506
5 CN5501 1 2
SE5502
1 D5502 D5503 IC5501
D5504
R5503 R5502
VD5502
VD5501
D5501
FB5502
D5507
(PITCH SENSOR)
C
J5501
S VIDEO
G
1-689-39316
LN5501
R5505
G
1-689-39311
11
1
4-89
3
4-90
16
MA-420
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
COVER
CK-127 (CONNECTOR, FUNCTION SWITCH) PRINTED WIRING BOARD FP-612 (PANEL REVERSE) FLEXIBLE PRINTED WIRING BOARD Refer to page 4-81 for common note for printed wiring board.
CK-127 BOARD(SIDE A)
A
S5211 S5207 S5208
(PANEL CLOSE)
CK-127 BOARD(SIDE B)
R5223 R5224
D5201D5202
R5210
C5202 C5203
1 5
R5225
A
6 5 1
LD5202
CN5204
65 1
S5209 VISUAL INDEX
S5210 SET UP S5212
z REC
CN5202
10
15
20
v (UP)
S5203
RESET
CN5207
D5208
2 10 15 20 25
B
S5213
S5214 ENTER S5215
D5209CN5203
C5201 R5201
30 38
D5203
65
R5215
R5227
CN5206
R5207 2 R5211
R5204
R5222 R5218
CN5201
1 5 35 39
R5212
b (LEFT)
BT5201 (LITHIUM BATTERY SECONDARY)
B (RIGHT)
S5216 S5204
VOL +
R5208
R5226
D5204D5205
R5206
6 5 1
D5207
V (DOWN)
C
S5201
EDIT
S5205 VOL S5206

DISPLAY/BATT INFO
CN5205
C
LD5201
1-689-390- 11
1-689-390-
11
16
16
FP-612 BOARD
LD9206 LD9205 LD9204 LD9203 LD9202 LD9201
CAUTION : Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
(PANEL REVERSE)
S9201
1-688-879-
12
4-91
4-92
CK-127/FP-612
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
FP-608 (USB, LANC), FP-609 (PLUNGER, EJECT), FP-610 (EXT MIC), FP-611 (AUDIO/VIDEO JACK) FLEXIBLE PRINTED WIRING BOARD : Uses unleaded solder.
1 8
FP-608 BOARD
LN9001 R9001
1 5
FP-609 BOARD
R9002
J9001
3 2 4
(LANC)
R9003
RY9051
10
S9052
LN9002 LN9003 LN9004 LN9005 LN9006 LN9007 LN9008 LN9009 LN9010 LN9011
(USB)
OPEN/EJECT
CN9001
S9053
(LID OPEN)
1-688-87512
LN9058 LN9056 LN9057 LN9055 LN9051 LN9054 LN9053 LN9052
S9051
(LID OPEN)
R9051
FP-610 BOARD
J9101
FP-611 BOARD
D9151
1-688-876-
D9051
R9052
12
MIC (PLUG IN POWER)

FB9101
SUPER NS/COLOR SLOW S
LD9159 FB9151
4 3
D9152
AUDIO/VIDEO
S9101
J9151
FB9153
6
LD9151 LD9152 LD9153 LD9154 LD9155 LD9156 LD9157 LD9158
FB9102
1-688-878FB9152
1-688-877-
12
12
LN9101 LN9102 LN9103 LN9104 LN9105 LN9106
Printed wiring board of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 board are not shown. Pages from 4-95 to 4-104 are not shown.
4-94
FP-608/FP-609/FP-610/FP-611
4-93
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
COVER
4-4. WAVEFORMS
CD-428 BOARD
PD-188 BOARD
CD-428 BOARD
1 IC5001 1,2
PD-188 BOARD
1 IC6001 w; 6 IC6001 rk
7.3 Vp-p H 7.8 Vp-p H H
480mVp-p
2 IC5001 3,4
2 IC6001 ws
7 IC6002 1
7.3 Vp-p H H 7.7 Vp-p H
2.8 Vp-p
3 IC5001 8
3 IC6001 wf
8 IC6002 wh
690mVp-p H H
8.2 Vp-p 89.8 nsec
2.1 Vp-p
4 IC5001 0
4 IC6001 rh
9 IC6002 rk
3.6 Vp-p 55.5 nsec H
380mVp-p 2.8 Vp-p V
5 IC5001 qa, qs
5 IC6001 rj
2.9 Vp-p 55.5 nsec H
480mVp-p
Waveforms of the VC-307 board is not shown. Pages from 4-106 to 4-107 are not shown.
4-105 CD-428/PD-188
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER

no mark : side A * mark : side B FB-220 BOARD
* C5301 B-2
4-5. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION

CD-428 BOARD
* C5001 C5002 * C5003 * C5004 * C5005 C5006 B-2 C-1 A-1 A-2 B-2 C-2
PD-188 BOARD
C6001 C6002 C6003 C6004 C6005 C6006 C6007 C6008 C6009 C6010 C6011 C6012 C6013 C6014 C6015 C6016 C6017 C6018 C6019 C6020 C6021 C6022 C6023 C6024 C6101 C6102 C6103 C6104 C6105 CN6001 CN6101 CN6201 CN6202 CN6203 D6001 D6002 D6003 D6101 D6102 D6103 D6104 FB6001 FB6002 IC6001 IC6002 IC6101 IC6102 L6001 L6002 L6101 Q6001 Q6002 Q6003 Q6004 Q6005 Q6101 Q6102 Q6103 Q6104 A-2 A-1 A-2 B-2 B-2 A-2 B-3 B-2 A-3 A-3 B-2 B-2 B-3 A-2 C-3 A-3 A-3 A-3 B-3 B-2 C-2 C-1 C-3 C-2 B-4 C-4 A-4 C-4 C-4 D-2 D-4 B-1 C-1 D-3 B-3 C-2 C-3 A-1 A-1 C-4 D-3 B-2 A-2 A-2 C-2 C-3 C-4 B-2 C-3 B-4 C-2 C-2 B-2 C-2 C-1 C-3 A-4 A-4 C-4 R6001 R6002 R6003 R6004 R6005 R6006 R6007 R6008 R6009 R6010 R6011 R6012 R6013 R6014 R6015 R6016 R6017 R6018 R6019 R6020 R6021 R6022 R6023 R6101 R6102 R6103 R6104 R6105 R6106 R6107 R6108 R6109 R6110 RB6001 RB6002 T6101 A-2 A-2 B-3 B-2 A-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-2 B-3 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-2 B-2 C-1 C-1 C-2 C-2 A-1 A-1 A-1 C-3 C-4 C-4 A-4 C-4 C-4 C-4 C-4 A-3 A-3 B-4
LB-084 BOARD
* C5601 * C5602 C-1 C-1
CN5601 B-1 CN5602 C-2 * D5601 * D5602 A-2 B-2
* CN5301 B-4 * CN5302 A-1 * D5301 * * * * * * * * * R5301 R5302 R5303 R5304 R5305 R5306 R5308 R5309 R5310 S5301 S5302 S5303 S5304 S5305 S5306 S5308 S5310 B-3 A-4 B-3 A-4 B-3 A-4 B-3 B-3 B-2 B-2 A-3 B-3 A-3 B-4 A-4 B-1 B-4 B-2
* CN5001 C-1 CN5002 D-2 FB5002 C-2 IC5001 B-2 * L5001 * L5002 Q5001 R5001 * R5002 R5003 B-1 B-2 C-1 C-1 A-1 C-2
* IC5601 C-2 * Q5602 * * * * * * R5602 R5603 R5604 R5605 R5606 R5607 C-2 B-2 B-2 C-2 C-2 B-2 B-2
* VD5301 B-2 * VD5302 B-2
CD-428/PD-188/LB-084/FB-220
4-108
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER

no mark : side A * mark : side B
MA-420 BOARD
* C5501 * C5502 C5503 C-1 B-1 C-4
CK-127 BOARD
BT5201 A-2 * C5201 * C5202 * C5203 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * CN5201 CN5202 CN5203 CN5204 CN5205 CN5206 CN5207 D5201 D5202 D5203 D5204 D5205 D5207 D5208 D5209 R5201 R5204 R5206 R5207 R5208 R5210 R5211 R5212 R5215 R5218 R5222 R5223 R5224 R5225 R5226 R5227 S5201 S5203 S5204 S5205 S5206 S5207 S5208 S5209 S5210 S5211 S5212 S5213 S5214 S5215 S5216 B-3 A-2 A-2 B-3 A-2 B-3 A-4 C-3 A-1 B-4 A-2 A-2 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-4 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-3 B-3 B-4 A-3 B-3 B-4 B-4 B-4 B-4 A-4 A-4 A-1 B-3 B-3 C-3 B-4 B-4 C-4 C-4 A-1 A-1 A-3 A-4 A-4 B-3 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-3
* CN5501 C-4 * CN5503 C-3 * D5501 D5502 D5503 D5504 D5507 * * * * FB5501 FB5502 FB5503 FB5504 E-3 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-1 B-2 D-3 C-2 B-2
IC5501 D-4 J5501 * R5501 * R5502 * R5503 R5504 * R5505 * R5506 * R5507 R5508 F-4 C-2 E-4 E-4 C-4 G-4 C-2 A-1 C-2
* SE5501 B-1 * SE5502 D-1 * VD5501 E-4 VD5502 E-4
Mounted parts location of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 are not shown. Pages from 4-110 to 4-114 are not shown.
4-109E MA-420/CK-127
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
NOTE
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST

NOTE: Characters A to Z of the electrical parts list indicate location of exploded views in which the desired part is shown.
Link
EXPLODED VIEWS
OVERALL SECTION
F PANEL/BATTERY PANEL SECTION
LENS SECTION
EVF SECTION
MD SECTION
CABINET (L) SECTION
CABINET (R) SECTION
LCD SECTION
Link
CD-428 BOARD CK-127 BOARD FB-220 BOARD FP-608 BOARD FP-609 BOARD
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

B F F E E
ACCESSORIES
G D D D
FP-610 BOARD FP-611 BOARD FP-612 BOARD LB-084 BOARD MA-420 BOARD
F D G C A
PD-188 BOARD MD-097 BOARD SS-174T BOARD VC-307 BOARD
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
NOTE: -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some differences from the original one. Items marked * are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not supplied. Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set. CAPACITORS: uF: F COILS uH: H RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms. METAL: metal-film resistor METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor F: nonflammable SEMICONDUCTORS In each case, u: , for example: uA...: A... , uPA... , PA... , uPB... , PB... , uPC... , PC... , uPD..., PD... Abbreviation CND : Canadian model AUS : Australian model EE : East European model HK : Hong Kong model
When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name. The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.
5-1
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
COVER
5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
ns : not supplied
1
MD section (See page 5-7)
10
EVF section (See page 5-6)
1
C B
Battery panel section (See page 5-4)
1 1 5 9
Lens section (See page 5-5) ns
1 1
1 1 1
4 1
F panel section (See page 5-4)
1
A
Cabinet (R) section (See page 5-9)

B
8 1
1 3 1 2 1 1
Ref. No. 1 2 2 3 4 5
Part No. 3-080-198-31 3-084-647-01 3-084-647-31 X-3953-658-1 1-688-710-11
Description SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2 COVER (F), JACK (DVD100) COVER (F), JACK (DVD100E) CAP ASSY, LENS FP-605 FLEXIBLE BOARD
Ref. No. 6 7 8 9 10
Part No. 3-078-889-11 3-084-659-01 3-084-660-01 1-962-367-11 3-084-667-01
Description SCREW (M1.7) LID (BT), CPC LID (BOTTOM), CPC HARNESS (CV-068) WATER PACKING
3-078-890-01 SCREW, TAPPING
5-3
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
5-1-2. F PANEL AND BATTERY PANEL SECTION

ns : not supplied
51
55 52 53
MIC901
54
MA
-4
20
54 63 64
ns
ns
62
ns
ns
56
60
ns
61
57 54 59 58 65
BT901
Ref. No. 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
Part No. X-3953-608-1 3-084-724-01 3-055-573-21 3-078-890-01 A-7078-801-A 3-080-198-31 X-3953-600-1 3-084-666-01 3-084-661-01
Description PANEL (650) ASSY, FRONT PLATE, FRONT HEAT SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 SCREW, TAPPING MA-420 BOARD, COMPLETE SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2 PANEL ASSY, BATTERY SHEET, BATT BRACKET (LOWER), STRAP
Ref. No. 60 61 62 63 64
Part No. 3-084-750-01 3-968-771-01 3-084-773-01 3-968-770-01 3-968-768-01
Description SHEET METAL (UPPER), STRAP SPRING, COMPRESSION TAPE (BT) SHAFT, BT SPRING, LOCK
* 65 3-055-189-01 FOOT (A) BT901 1-694-772-11 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY MIC901 1-418-351-11 MICROPHONE UNIT
5-4
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
5-1-3. LENS SECTION
108 107
109
102 105
IC5001
113
114 115 117
116 112 110 106 104 102 111
119 118
102
103
120
101
Be sure to read Precautions upon replacing CCD imager on page 4-11 when changing the CCD imager.
Ref. No. 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
Part No. 3-084-692-01 3-078-889-11 3-084-691-01 3-084-684-02 3-078-890-01 3-084-688-01 1-785-594-11 1-688-709-11 3-084-689-01 8-848-767-01
Description SHEET, LENS (650) SCREW (M1.7) SHEET, LF650 RADIATION FRAME (650), LENS SCREW, TAPPING SHEET (L), SUCTIN WATER CONNECTOR (HOT SHOE), OUTER FP-604 FLEXIBLE BOARD SHEET, HOT COPPER LEAF DEVICE, LENS LSV-650E
Ref. No. 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 IC5001 IC5001
Part No. 3-053-973-01 A-7078-806-A 3-080-204-21 3-084-685-01 1-688-711-11 3-084-343-01 3-084-690-01 1-469-298-31 3-084-686-01 A-7111-334-A
Description RUBBER (W), SEAL CD-428 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE SCREW, TAPPING, P2 SHEET, CD RADIATION FP-606 FLEXIBLE BOARD HOLDER, LENS SHEET, ADHESIVE, CORE FILTER, EMI HEAT SINK (650), CD CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (DVD100)
1-758-155-21 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL
A-7111-335-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (DVD100E)
5-5
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
5-1-4. EVF SECTION
ns : not supplied
162 167 165 162 160 159 158

ns ns
168
163 166
161
157
164
LCD902
155 153 156
162
154
152 151
ns
Ref. No. 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160
Part No. 3-080-198-31 X-3953-605-1 3-084-760-01 1-688-708-11 X-3953-118-1 3-083-290-01 A-7078-802-A 3-080-615-01 3-080-618-01 3-080-613-01
Description SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2 HINGE ASSY, VF CABINET, VF TILT FP-603 FLEXIBLE BOARD SLIDE ASSY, VF SHEET VF LB-084 BOARD, COMPLETE CUSHION (LB) (40) GUIDE (40), LAMP ILLUMINATOR (40)
Ref. No. 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 LCD902
Part No. 3-080-614-01 3-080-198-11 X-3953-119-1 3-080-617-11 X-3953-602-1 3-078-890-01 3-074-433-01 X-3953-603-2 8-753-036-70
Description SHEET (40), PRISM SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2 CABINET ASSY, LCD CABINET (LOWER), VF SLIDE CABINET (UPPER) ASSY, VF SLIDE SCREW, TAPPING LABEL, COLOR (VF) EYE CUP (55) ASSY LCX032ANA-5
5-6
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
5-1-5. MD SECTION
ns : not supplied
207 208 209 210 206
201
Cabinet (L) section (See page 5-8)
MD
09
7
ns
211
F
204
213 Refer to LEVEL 3

Exploded views of MD-097 block assy. (Pages 5-11 and 5-12)
ns
201
203 202 201 212
VC
-3
07
201
Ref. No. 201 202 203 204 206 207
Part No. 3-078-889-11 3-084-658-01 A-7078-812-A 3-080-204-21 CAUTION
Description SCREW (M1.7) FRAME, JK FP-611 BOARD, COMPLETE SCREW, TAPPING, P2 TAPE (0716)
Ref. No. 208 209 210 211 212 213
Part No. 3-084-742-01 3-084-662-01 3-080-198-31 3-087-264-01 A-7078-813-A
Description BASE (650), NS BLIND, ZOOM SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2 SHEET, INSULATING, VC VC-307 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
3-084-743-01 KNOB (650), NS
A-7111-651-A MP-097 BLOCK ASSY (SERVICE)
CAUTION : For the parts of 206 : TAPE (0716) (3-084-668-01) cut WOVEN (T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desired length and use it.
5-7
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
5-1-6. CABINET (L) SECTION
ns : not supplied
254 257 255 260 253

ns
261 262 263
252 251
ns
259
ns
256 258
ns
257
ns
251 267
266
251
257
265 268 267 251 264
Ref. No. 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259
Part No. 3-078-890-01 A-7078-811-A 3-084-664-01 X-3953-601-3 X-3953-598-2 3-068-457-01 3-973-497-91 3-080-204-01 X-3953-599-1
Description SCREW, TAPPING FP-609 BOARD, COMPLETE SHEET METAL, PWB RETAINER CABINET (L) ASSY FRAME ASSY, EJECT SHAFT, STRAP SCREW (M1.7), 0-NO. +P 2 SCREW, TAPPING, P2 HINGE ASSY, D LID
Ref. No. 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268
Part No. 3-087-322-01 3-084-764-01 3-084-737-01 3-084-771-01 A-7078-800-A CAUTION 1-477-795-11 3-080-204-21 3-084-645-01
Description SCREW (M1.7), EG GRIP, P2 COVER, D LID CLAW, LID LOCK BELT, GRIP FP-608 BOARD, COMPLETE TAPE (0716) SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PS-CX5500) SCREW, TAPPING, P2 COVER (L), JACK
CAUTION : For the parts of 265 : TAPE (0716) (3-084-668-01) cut WOVEN (T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desired length and use it.
5-8
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
COVER
5-1-7. CABINET (R) SECTION
ns : not supplied
309
309 310 309 312
303
FB -22 0
LCD section (See page 5-10)
306 308 307 314

ns
311 317
316 B 323 318 319 313
306 322 320 324 315 303

CK
314
305
-12 7
SP901
321 314 321
314
306
304 302 303 301

CAUTION 1 : Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
: BT5201 (Lithium battery) CK-127 board on the mount position. (See page 4-91)
Ref. No. 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 Part No. 3-055-257-11 X-3953-607-1 3-078-890-01 1-688-707-11 A-7078-807-A CAUTION2 1-688-712-11 3-084-697-01 3-078-889-11 A-7078-809-A Description TRIPOD (LARGE) FRAME (25) ASSY, BOTTOM SCREW, TAPPING FP-602 FLEXIBLE BOARD CK-127 (25) BOARD, COMPLETE TAPE (0716) FP-607 FLEXIBLE BOARD SHEET METAL, FB RETAINER SCREW (M1.7) FP-610 BOARD, COMPLETE Ref. No. 314 315 316 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 SP901 Part No. 3-080-204-21 1-477-796-11 X-3953-604-1 X-3953-638-1 3-084-693-01 3-084-706-01 4-942-636-01 3-084-696-01 3-084-817-31 CAUTION2 Description SCREW, TAPPING, P2 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (KP-CX5500) CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100) CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100E) COVER (U), JACK CUSHION (25), PANEL EMBLEM (NO.3.5), SONY SPRING, HINGE BLIND SCREW (M1.7), SCOTCH GRIP, P2 TAPE (HS)
A-7078-808-A FB-220 BOARD, COMPLETE 3-085-252-01 SHEET, FB MUFFLE 3-080-198-31 SCREW(M1.7),LOCK ACE,P2
X-3953-606-1 CABINET (25) ASSY, SIDE 3-085-070-01 SHEET, INSULATING, CD 1-825-260-21 LOUD SPEAKER (1.6CM)
5-9
CAUTION 2 : For the parts of 306 : TAPE (0716) (3-084-668-01) and TAPE (HS) (3-084-810-01) cut WOVEN (T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desired length and use it.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
5-1-8. LCD SECTION
ns : not supplied
361 362
B
364 365 359

LCD901
A
ns
360 363
ND901
ns
356 355 354 353 352

A
358 357
PD
-1
88
351 352
Ref. No. 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359
Part No. X-3953-596-1 3-087-322-01 1-962-364-12 3-078-889-11 A-7078-799-A X-3953-594-1 3-084-782-01 3-084-785-01 3-083-291-01
Description CABINET (C) (25) ASSY, P SCREW (M1.7), EG GRIP, P2 HARNESS (PV-018) SCREW (M1.7) PD-188 (25) BOARD, COMPLETE FRAME (25) ASSY, P SPRING, P LOCK BUTTON, P LOCK CABINET (M) (25), P
Ref. No. 360 361 362 363 364
Part No. 3-083-293-01 A-7078-810-A X-3953-595-1 3-084-710-01 3-083-294-01
Description COVER (O) (25), HINGE FP-612 BOARD, COMPLETE HINGE (25) ASSY, LCD SHEET, ADHESIVE, PR COVER (U) (25), HINGE
365 3-973-497-91 SCREW (M1.7), 0-NO. +P 2 0 ND901 1-477-756-31 BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE (2.5) LCD901 8-753-052-14 ACX307AKA-J
Exploded view and parts list of MD-097 BLOCK are not shown. Page 5-11 and 512 are not shown.
5-10
Note : The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.
Note : Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E CD-428 CK-127 FB-220
5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. Part No. Description < DIODE > D5203 D5204 D5205 D5207 D5208 D5209 8-719-062-16 8-719-062-16 8-719-062-16 8-719-062-16 8-719-056-85 DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3) 01ZA8.2(TPL3) 01ZA8.2(TPL3) 01ZA8.2(TPL3) UDZSTE-178.2B A-7078-806-A CD-428 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE *************************** (IC5001 is not included in this complete board.) < CAPACITOR > C5001 C5002 C5003 C5004 C5005 C5006 1-165-897-11 1-162-915-11 1-162-970-11 1-113-985-11 1-164-943-11 TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 22uF 10PF 0.01uF 10uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 20% 0.5PF 10% 20% 10% 10% 10V 50V 25V 20V 16V 16V
8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3) < RESISTOR >
1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP < CONNECTOR >
CN5001 1-784-421-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 27P CN5002 1-794-375-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 2P < FERRITE BEAD > FB5002 1-414-554-21 FERRITE < IC > IC5001 IC5001 A-7111-334-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD100) A-7111-335-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD100E) < COIL > L5001 L5002 1-414-406-11 INDUCTOR 1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR < TRANSISTOR > Q5001 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR < RESISTOR > R5001 1-216-832-11 METAL CHIP 8.2K 5% 1/16W ************************************************************ A-7078-807-A CK-127 (25) BOARD, COMPLETE ************************** < BATTERY > 0 BT5201 1-756-128-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY) < CONNECTOR > CN5201 CN5202 CN5203 CN5204 CN5205 1-784-423-21 1-794-997-11 1-778-506-21 1-691-344-11 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 39P PIN, CONNECTOR 20P PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 2P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 6P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P 2SC4178-F13F14-T1 220uH 10uH 0uH
R5201 R5204 R5206 R5207 R5208 R5210 R5211 R5212 R5215 R5218 R5222 R5223 R5224 R5225 R5226 R5227
1-218-990-11 1-218-953-11 1-218-954-11 1-218-954-11 1-218-954-11 1-218-955-11 1-218-955-11 1-218-955-11 1-218-957-11 1-218-960-11 1-218-964-11 1-218-957-11 1-218-960-11 1-218-964-11 1-218-990-11
SHORT CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT CHIP
0 1K 1.2K 1.2K 1.2K 1.5K 1.5K 1.5K 2.2K 3.9K 8.2K 2.2K 3.9K 8.2K 0 470
5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
1-218-949-11 RES-CHIP < SWITCH >
5%
1/16W
S5201 S5203 S5204 S5205 S5206 S5207 S5209 S5210 S5211 S5212
1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11 1-762-805-21 1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11
SWITCH, TACTILE (EDIT) SWITCH, TACTILE (RESET) SWITCH, TACTILE (VOL+) SWITCH, TACTILE (VOL-) SWITCH, TACTILE (DISPLAY/BATT INFO) SWITCH, PUSH (1 KEY) (PANEL_CLOSE) SWITCH, TACTILE (VISUAL INDEX) SWITCH, TACTILE (SETUP) SWITCH, TACTILE (REC z) SWITCH, TACTILE (v UP)
S5213 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (b LEFT) S5214 1-786-157-31 TACTILE SWITCH (ENTER) S5215 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (B RIGHT) S5216 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (V DOWN) *********************************************************** A-7078-808-A FB-220 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** < CAPACITOR > C5301 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP < CONNECTOR > 0.01uF 10% 25V
CN5206 1-766-336-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P
Be sure to read Precautions upon replacing CCD imager on page 4-11 when changing the CCD imager. CAUTION : Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
CN5301 1-691-344-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 6P CN5302 1-691-344-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 6P
5-13
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E FB-220
Ref. No.
FP-608
FP-609
FP-610
FP-611
Ref. No.
FP-612
Part No.
LB-084
Description < SWITCH >
Part No.
Description < DIODE >
D5301
8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3) < RESISTOR >
S9051 1-762-805-21 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (LID OPEN) S9052 1-786-179-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (LID OPEN) S9053 1-786-180-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (OPEN) ************************************************************ 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W A-7078-809-A FP-610 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** < FERRITE BEAD > FB9101 1-500-444-11 FERRITE FB9102 1-500-444-11 FERRITE < JACK > J9101 1-691-737-41 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (MIC (PLUG IN POWER)) < SWITCH > S9101 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (SUPER NS/COLOR SLOW S) ************************************************************ A-7078-812-A FP-611 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** < DIODE > D9151 D9152 8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3) 8-719-062-16 DIODE 01ZA8.2(TPL3) < FERRITE BEAD > FB9151 1-500-444-11 FERRITE FB9152 1-500-444-11 FERRITE FB9153 1-500-444-11 FERRITE < JACK > J9151 1-778-040-11 JACK, SMALL TYPE (AUDIO/VIDEO) *********************************************************** A-7078-810-A FP-612 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** < SWITCH > S9201 1-771-338-31 SWITCH, PUSH (PANEL REVERSE) *********************************************************** A-7078-802-A LB-084 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** < CAPACITOR > C5601 C5602 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-164-505-11 CERAMIC CHIP < CONNECTOR > 0.1uF 2.2uF 10% 10V 16V 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH
R5301 R5302 R5303 R5304 R5305 R5306 R5308 R5309 R5310
1-218-954-11 1-218-954-11 1-218-955-11 1-218-955-11 1-218-957-11 1-218-957-11 1-218-960-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11
RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP < SWITCH >
1.2K 1.2K 1.5K 1.5K 2.2K 2.2K 3.9K 0 0
S5301 S5302 S5303 S5304 S5305 S5306 S5308 S5310
1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11 1-786-157-11
SWITCH, TACTILE (BACK LIGHT) SWITCH, TACTILE (x STOP) SWITCH, TACTILE (FADER) SWITCH, TACTILE (. PREV) SWITCH, TACTILE (REVIEW)
1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (B PLAY (PLAYBACK)) 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (> NEXT) 1-786-157-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (X PAUSE) < VARISTOR >
VD5301 1-801-862-11 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608) VD5302 1-801-862-11 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608) ************************************************************ A-7078-800-A FP-608 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************* < CONNECTOR > CN9001 1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE (USB 5P) < JACK > J9001 1-793-995-21 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE ( < RESISTOR > R9002 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 0 5% 1/16W R9003 1-216-296-11 SHORT CHIP 0 ************************************************************ A-7078-811-A FP-609 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** < DIODE > D9051 8-719-073-33 DIODE CL-165HR/YG-D-T < RESISTOR > R9051 R9052 1-216-809-11 METAL CHIP 1-216-816-11 METAL CHIP < RELAY > RY9051 1-454-583-11 SOLENOID, PLUNGER D5602 100 390 5% 5% 1/16W 1/16W (LANC))
CN5601 1-779-334-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 20P CN5602 1-691-354-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 16P < DIODE > 6-500-375-01 DIODE NSCW455T-TC9
5-14
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E LB-084
Ref. No. Part No. Description < IC > IC5601 8-759-581-11 IC NJM2125F(TE2) < TRANSISTOR > Q5602 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR < RESISTOR > < CAPACITOR > R5603 1-208-941-11 METAL CHIP 180K 0.5% 1/16W R5604 1-208-721-11 METAL CHIP 39K 0.5% 1/16W R5605 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R5606 1-216-839-11 METAL CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R5607 1-211-983-11 METAL CHIP 39 0.5% 1/10W ************************************************************ A-7078-801-A MA-420 BOARD, COMPLETE *********************** < CAPACITOR > C5503 1-117-919-11 TANTAL. CHIP < CONNECTOR > CN5501 1-778-507-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 4P CN5503 1-764-529-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 22P < DIODE > D5501 D5503 D5504 D5507 8-719-056-85 6-500-512-01 8-719-073-01 8-719-064-07 DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE UDZSTE-178.2B CL-330IRS-X-TU MA111-(K8).S0 SML-310LTT86 10uF 20% 6.3V C6012 C6013 C6014 C6015 C6016 C6017 C6018 C6019 C6022 C6023 C6024 C6101 C6103 C6104 0 C6105 1-125-777-11 1-162-964-11 1-109-982-11 1-164-870-11 1-165-908-11 1-165-908-11 1-165-908-11 1-115-566-11 1-125-777-11 1-109-982-11 1-107-826-11 1-115-566-11 1-164-657-11 1-125-777-11 1-100-371-11 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP < CONNECTOR > CN6001 1-815-031-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 24P CN6101 1-764-709-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (LIF) 10P CN6201 1-794-997-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 20P < DIODE > D6001 D6003 D6103 D6104 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W IC6001 IC6002 IC6101 IC6102 8-752-109-08 8-752-407-33 8-759-564-49 8-759-075-70 8-719-084-47 8-719-050-42 8-719-073-01 8-719-059-47 DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE 1SV290(TPL3) RD3.3UM-T1B MA111-(K8).S0 PG1111R-TR 0.1uF 0.001uF 1uF 68PF 1uF 1uF 1uF 4.7uF 0.1uF 1uF 0.1uF 4.7uF 0.015uF 0.1uF 12PF 10% 10% 10% 5% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 5% 10V 50V 10V 50V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 16V 10V 50V 10V 3.15KV C6001 C6002 C6003 C6004 C6005 C6007 C6008 C6009 C6010 C6011 1-127-760-11 1-135-259-11 1-164-943-11 1-164-943-11 1-164-943-11 1-125-777-11 1-164-943-11 1-135-177-21 1-164-943-11 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP TANTAL. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP TANTALUM CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 1uF 0.01uF 560PF 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 5% 6.3V 6.3V 16V 16V 16V 10V 16V 20V 16V 50V N1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) Ref. No. Part No. Description < VARISTOR > VD5501 1-803-974-21 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608) VD5502 1-803-974-21 VARISTOR, CHIP (1608) *********************************************************** A-7078-799-A PD-188 (25) BOARD, COMPLETE **************************
MA-420
PD-188
< FERRITE BEAD > FB5501 FB5502 FB5503 FB5504 1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21 1-469-179-21 FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE < IC > IC5501 8-742-221-00 HYB IC SBX3055-01 < JACK > J5501 1-778-518-11 CONNECTOR, EXTERNAL (S VIDEO) < RESISTOR > R5501 R5502 R5503 R5504 R5505 R5506 R5507 R5508 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-864-11 1-216-805-11 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 0 0 0 47 0 680 0 0 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH
< FERRITE BEAD > FB6001 1-414-760-21 FERRITE FB6002 1-414-760-21 FERRITE < IC > IC IC IC IC CXA3289BR-T4 CXD3512R-T4 TC7W53FU(TE12R) TA75S393F-TE85R 0uH 0uH
1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP 1-218-990-11 SHORT CHIP < SENSOR >
SE5501 1-476-807-31 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (YAW) SE5502 1-476-807-41 SENSOR, ANGULAR VELOCITY (PITCH)
5-15
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E PD-188
Ref. No.
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
MD-097
< COIL >
SS-174T
VC-307
Ref. No. Part No. Description A-7078-804-A MD-097 BOARD, COMPLETE (Note1) ******************************
Part No.
Description
L6001 L6002 L6101
1-469-525-91 INDUCTOR 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 1-428-878-11 INDUCTOR < TRANSISTOR >
10uH 6.8uH 82uH
************************************************************ A-7078-805-A SS-174T BOARD, COMPLETE **********************
Q6001 Q6002 Q6003 Q6004 Q6005 Q6101 Q6102 Q6104
8-729-054-48 8-729-054-48 6-550-234-01 6-550-232-01 6-550-232-01
TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR
N1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) N1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3) UNR32A300LS0 2SA207800LS0 2SA207800LS0 UNR32A300LS0 CPH5504-TL-E RN4983FE(TPLR3)
************************************************************ A-707-881-3A VC-307 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE *************************** ************************************************************
6-550-234-01 TRANSISTOR 6-550-065-01 TRANSISTOR 8-729-054-48 TRANSISTOR < RESISTOR >
R6001 R6002 R6003 R6004 R6006 R6007 R6008 R6009 R6010 R6011 R6012 R6013 R6014 R6015 R6016 R6017 R6018 R6019 R6020 R6021 R6022 R6023 R6103 R6104 R6105 R6106 R6107 R6108 R6109 R6110
1-208-931-11 1-218-985-11 1-218-953-11 1-218-953-11 1-218-958-11 1-218-973-11 1-218-973-11 1-218-975-11 1-218-969-11 1-218-975-11 1-218-989-11 1-218-977-11 1-218-965-11 1-218-965-11 1-218-953-11 1-218-973-11 1-218-966-11 1-218-989-11 1-218-975-11 1-218-979-11 1-208-957-11 1-218-990-11 1-218-965-11 1-218-980-11 1-218-969-11 1-216-055-00 1-218-965-11 1-218-969-11 1-218-941-81 1-218-949-11
METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP
68K 470K 1K 1K 2.7K 47K 47K 68K 22K 68K 1M 100K 10K 10K 1K 47K 12K 1M 68K 150K 820K 0 10K 180K 22K 1.8K 10K 22K 100 470
0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%
1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/10W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W
Electrical parts list of the MD-097, SS-174T and VC-307 board are not shown. Pages from 5-17 to 5-31 are not shown.
< COMPOSITION CIRCUIT BLOCK > RB6001 1-234-372-21 RES, NETWORK 100X4 < TRANSFORMER > 0 T6101 1-435-786-31 TRANSFORMER, INVERTER ************************************************************ (1005)
Note1 : Since a service is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK ASSY (A-7111-651-A) and not for the single MD-097 board, complete.
5-16
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Checking supplied accessories.

Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.
Power cord (Main lead)(1) (AEP, EE, E model) 0 1-769-608-11 Power cord (Main lead)(1) (AUS model) 0 1-696-819-21 Power cord (Main lead)(1) (UK, HK model) 0 1-783-374-11 Power cord (Main lead)(1) (US, CND model) 0 1-790-107-22
AC power adaptor (1) (AC-L15A) 0 1-477-533-32
NP-FM50 battery pack (1) (not supplied)
A/V connecting cable (1.5m) (1) 1-824-097-11
Lid Battery Case (3-709-572-01)
Wireless Remote Commander (1) (RMT-820) 1-477-868-21
R6 (size AA) batteries for the Remote Commander (2) (not supplied)
Shoulder strap (1) 3-987-015-01
Lens cap (1) X-3953-658-1 CD-ROM (SPVD-011 (I) USB Driver) (1) (US, CND model) 3-086-131-01 CD-ROM (SPVD-011 USB Driver) (1) (AEP, UK, EE, E, HK, AUS model) 3-086-132-01 Cleaning cloth (1) 3-073-861-01
USB cable (1) 1-823-930-11
DVD-R (DMR30) (1) (not supplied)
2-pin conversion adaptor (1) (E, HK model) 1-569-008-12

Abbreviation CND : Canadian model EE : East European model
21-pin conversion connector (1) (AEP, UK, EE model) 1-770-783-21
HK : Hong Kong model AUS : Australian model
Other accessories
3-081-300-13 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)(DVD100:US,CND,E) 3-081-300-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH)(DVD100:CND) 3-081-300-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (DVD100:E) 3-081-300-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL CHINESE) (DVD100:E) 3-081-300-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(DVD100:E) 3-081-302-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH/FRENCH) (DVD100E:AEP,UK,E,HK,AUS) 3-081-302-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE) (DVD100E:AEP) 3-081-302-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/GREEK)(DVD100E:AEP) 3-081-302-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (GERMAN/DUTCH) (DVD100E:AEP)
3-081-302-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SWEDISH/RUSSIAN) (DVD100E:E) 3-081-302-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC/PERSIAN) (DVD100E:E) 3-081-302-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONAL CHINESE) (DVD100E:HK) 3-081-302-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SIMPLIFIED CHINESE) (DVD100E:E)
5-32E
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
9-876-273-31
Sony EMCS Co.
114
2003L1600-1 2003.12 Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
COVER
[Description of main button functions on toolbar of the Adobe Acrobat Reader Ver5.0 (for Windows)]
Toolbar
Printing a text
1. Click the Print button . 2. Specify a printer, print range, number of copies, and other options, and then click [OK].
Moving with link

1. Select either palm tool , zoom tool , text selection tool
Application of printing:
To set a range to be printed within a page, select the graphic and drag on the page to enclose a range to selection tool be printed, and then click the Print button.
, or graphic selection tool . 2. Place the pointer in the position in a text where the link exists (such as a button on cover and the table of contents page, or blue characters on the removal flowchart page or drawing page), and the pointer will change to the forefinger form . 3. Then, click the link. (You will go to the link destination.)
Moving with bookmark: Finding a text

1. Click the Find button . 2. Enter a character string to be found into a text box, and click the [Find]. (Specify the find options as necessary) 3. Open the find dialog box again, and click the [Find Again] and you can find the matched character strings displayed next. (Character strings entered previously are displayed as they are in the text box.) Click an item (text) on the bookmark pallet, and you can move to the link destination. Also, clicking can display the hidden items. (To go back to original state, click )
Application to the Service Manual:

The parts on the drawing pages (block diagrams, circuit diagrams, printed circuit boards) and parts list pages in a text can be found using this find function. For example, find a Ref. No. of IC on the block diagram, and click the [Find Again] continuously, so that you can move to the Ref. No. of IC on the circuit diagram or printed circuit board diagram successively. Note: The find function may not be applied to the Service Manual depending on the date of issue.
Zooming or rotating the screen display

Zoom in Select the zoom tool Select the zoom tool Zoom out Select the zoom-out tool and click the page. and drag a range to be zoomed in.
and click the page. and drag a range to be zoomed
Switching a page
To move to the first page, click the To move to the last page, click the To move to the next page, click the . . . .
Select the zoom-out tool out.
To move to the previous page, click the
Zoom in/out Click the triangle button in the zoom control box to select the display magnification. Or, you may click ing in or out. or for zoom-
Reversing the screens displayed once

To reverse the previous screens (operation) one by one, click . the To advance the reversed screens (operation) one by one, click the . Rotate Click rotate tool
, and the page then rotates 90 degrees each.

This function allows you to go and back between circuit diagram and printed circuit board diagram, and accordingly it will be convenient for the voltage check.

The printed circuit board diagram you see now can be changed to the same direction as the set.
Reverse
987627332.pdf
Revision History
Ver. 1.0 1.1 Date 2003.08 2003.12 History Official Release Correction-1 Contents Correction of the schematic diagrams, printed wiring boards, waveforms, repair parts list. S.M. correction: Page 4-11, 4-13, 4-92, 4-105, 5-3, 5-9, 5-13, 5-16 S.M. Rev. issued Yes
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
RMT-820
LEVEL
2 1
SERVICE MANUAL
Ver 1.1 2003. 12
US Model Canadian Model

DCR-DVD100
AEP Model UK Model East European Model Hong Kong Model Australian Model
DCR-DVD100E
E Model
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
CORRECTION-1
Correct your service manual as shown below.
Correction of the schematic diagrams, printed wiring boards, waveforms, repair parts list.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

Page INCORRECT CORRECT : Changed portion.
CD-428 BOARD (Location C-2)

R-6.4 P0 R-6.4 P0 R-0.3 P0 R-0.3 P0 R9.1 P0 R12.0 P0
CD-428 BOARD (Location C-2)

ICX220BK-13 (DVD100) ICX221BK-13 (DVD100E) R-6.4 P0 V4 R-6.4 P0 R-0.3 P0 R-0.3 P0 R9.1 P0
5 6
R12.0 P0
7
ICX220BK-13
V4
V3
V2
V1
V3
V2
VDD
V1
V_HOLD
V_DRAIN
V_HOLD
4-11
IC5001
CCD IMAGER
2 5
SUB H2 H1
IC5001
CCD IMAGER
2 5
SUB H2
IC5001
CCD_OUT
14
13
12
11
10
14
13
12
11
10
6.8 0.4
6.8 0.4
6 0
4 0
7 0
3 0
5 0
6 0
4 0
7 0
3 0
PD-188 BOARD (1/2) (Location B-10)

FB6002 0uH C6009 1u 25V TA C6010 0.01u B
PD-188 BOARD (1/2) (Location B-10)

FB6002 0uH C6009 1u 25V TA C6010 0.01u B
PFRP
4-13
R6005 XX 1.9
R6005 XX
PFRP
BGP
PRG
FRP
BGP
PRG
BLK
BLK
FRP
36 N.C.
35 EXT_DA
34 N.C
33 BGP
32 BLACK_IN
31 PRG
30 FRP
29 PFRP
28 XVP.SAVE
27 VP
26 P_DC_DET
25 Vcc2
36 N.C.
35 EXT_DA
34 N.C
33 BGP
32 BLACK_IN
31 PRG
30 FRP
29 PFRP
28 XVP.SAVE
27 VP
26 P_DC_DET
13.5
2.7
2.8
1.4
1.4
2.8
7.0
3.3
1.9
2.7
2.8
1.4
1.4
2.8
7.0
3.3
25 Vcc2

Page INCORRECT CORRECT
: Changed portion.
CK-127 BOARD (SIDE B) (Location B-4)

D5203
CK-127 BOARD (SIDE B) (Location B-4)

C5201 R5201 C5201 R5201
10 15 20 25 30 38
10 15
20 25
30
38
R5222 R5218
R5208
1 5
35 39
R5222 R5218
R5212
R5212
4-92
CN5201
R5211
CN5201
1 5 35 39
R5211
D5204
R5208
D5204
D5207
D5207
D5203
R5215
R5215
5 0
CCD_OUT
4
GND RG
IC5001
3
VL
V_DRAIN GND
3 4
RG H1 VL
VDD
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4-3. WAVEFORMS
Page INCORRECT CORRECT
: Changed portion.
CD-428 BOARD
5 IC5001 qa
4-105
CD-428 BOARD
5 IC5001 qa, qs
2.9 Vp-p 55.5 nsec 55.5 nsec
2.9 Vp-p
SECTION 5 REPAIR PARTS LIST

5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
Page INCORRECT CORRECT : Changed portion.
5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION

5-3
Ref. No. 10 Part No. Description Ref. No. 10 Part No. Description 3-084-667-01 WATER PAKING 3-084-667-01 WATER PACKING
5-1-7. CABINET (R) SECTION

Ref. No. Part No. Description Ref. No. 316 316 Part No. Description
5-9
316 316
X-3953-604-1 CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100) X-3953-638-2 CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100E)
X-3953-604-1 CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100) X-3953-638-1 CABINET (R) (25) ASSY (DVD100E)
5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

Page
Ref. No. Part No.
: Changed portion. CORRECT

Ref. No. Part No. Description
: Added portion.
INCORRECT
Description
5-13
A-7078-806-A CD-428 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE *************************** (IC5001 is not included in this complete board.) < IC > IC5001 IC5001 Ref. No. A-7111-334-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD200) A-7111-335-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD200E) Part No. Description IC5001 IC5001 Ref. No.
A-7078-806-A CD-428 (960) BOARD, COMPLETE *************************** (IC5001 is not included in this complete board.) < IC > A-7111-334-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD100) A-7111-335-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER)(DVD100E) Part No. Description
A-7078-804-A MD-097 BOARD, COMPLETE *********************
A-7078-804-A MD-097 BOARD, COMPLETE (Note1) *****************************
************************************************************ ************************************************************
5-16 Note1 : Since a service is provided only for the MD-097 BLOCK ASSY (A-7111-651-A) and not for the single MD-097 board, complete.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
9-876-273-91
Sony EMCS Co.
2003L1600-1 2003.12 Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
RMT-820
Ver 1.0 2003. 08
Revision History How to use Acrobat Reader
SECTION 6 ADJUSTMENTS
ADJ
Link
Before starting adjustment
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards
VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT

PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT

AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT INITIALIZATION OF A, B, C, D, E, F, 1F PAGE DATA CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
SERVICE MODE
ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER DATA PROCESS SERVICE MODE
Contents of LEVEL 2 and LEVEL 3 Service Manual

CONTENTS 1. SERVICE NOTE 2. DISASSEMBLY 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS LEVEL 2 a a OVERALL POWER CD-428, PD-188, LB-084, MA-420, CK-127, FB-220 BOARD, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (KP-CX5500, PS-CX5500), FP-610, FP-611 FLEXIBLE EXPLODED VIEWS ELECTRICAL PARTS LEVEL 3 MD-097, SS-174T, VC-307 BOARD
a (MD-097, SS-174T, VC-307 BOARD)
9-876-273-51
Sony EMCS Co.
2003H1600-1 2003.8 Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
TABLE OF CONTENTS 6.
1. 1-1. 6-1. 1-1.
ADJUSTMENT
Before starting adjustment 6-1 Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards. 6-2 CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT 6-4 PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT (CAMERA SECTION) 6-4 1-1-1. List of Service Tools 6-4 1-1-2. Preparations 6-5 1-1-3. Precaution 6-7 1. Setting the Switch 6-7 2. Order of Adjustments 6-7 3. Subjects 6-7 1-2. INITIALIZATION OF A, B, C, D, E, F, 1F PAGE DATA 6-8 1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF A, B, C, D PAGE DATA 6-8 1. Initializing the A, B, C, D Page Data 6-8 2. Modification of A, B, C, D Page Data 6-8 3. A Page Table 6-9 4. B Page Table 6-9 5. C Page Table 6-10 6. D Page Table 6-10 1-2-2. INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 1F PAGE DATA 6-11 1. Initializing the E, F, 1F Page Data 6-11 2. Modification of E, F, 1F Page Data 6-11 3. E Page Table 6-11 4. F Page Table 6-12 5. 1F Page Table 6-13 1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 6-14 1. 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment (VC-307 board) 6-14 2. HALL Adjustment 6-14 3. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) 6-15 4. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject More Than 500m Away) 6-16 4-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) 6-16 4-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2) 6-16 5. Flange Back Check 6-17 6. Optical Axis Adjustment 6-18 7. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment 6-19 8. Picture Frame Setting 6-20 9. Color Reproduction Adjustment 6-21 10. MAX GAIN Adjustment 6-22 11. LV Standard Data Input 6-22 12. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame) 6-23 13. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input 6-23 14. Auto White Balance Adjustment 6-24 15. White Balance Check 6-25 16. Steady Shot Check 6-26 1-4. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 6-27 1. VCO Adjustment (VC-307 board) 6-28 2. RGB AMP Adjustment (VC-307 board) 6-29 3. Contrast Adjustment (VC-307 board) 6-29 4. White Balance Adjustment (VC-307 board) 6-30 1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT 6-31 1. VCO Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-31 2. Bright Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-32 3. Black Limit Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-32 4. PSIG GLAY Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-33 5. Contrast Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-33 6. Center Level Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-34 7. V COM Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-34 8. White Balance Adjustment (PD-188 board) 6-35
6-2. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT 6-36 2-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS 6-36 2-1-1. Equipment to Required 6-36 2-1-2. Precautions on Adjusting 6-37 2-1-3. Adjusting Connectors 6-38 2-1-4. Connecting the Equipment 6-38 2-1-5. Input/Output Level and Impedance 6-39 2-2. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 6-40 S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-307 Board) 6-40 1. 2. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment (VC-307 Board) 6-40 3. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-307 Board) 6-41 2-3. AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS 6-42 1. Overall Level Characteristics Check 6-42 2. Overall Distortion Check 6-42 3. Overall Noise Level Check 6-42 6-3. SERVICE MODE 6-43 3-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER 6-43 1. Using the adjustment remote commander 6-43 2. Precautions upon using the adjustment remote commander 6-43 3-2. DATA PROCESS 6-44 3-3. SERVICE MODE 6-45 1. Setting the Test Mode 6-45 2. Bit value discrimination 6-45 3. Switch check (1) 6-46 4. Switch check (2) 6-46 5. Switch check (3) 6-46 6. Switch check (4) 6-47 7. Record of Use check 6-47 8. Record of Self-diagnosis check 6-48
* Optical axis frame and Color reproduction frame are shown on pages 6-49 and 6-50.
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1. Before starting adjustment
EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board

The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct. Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.
Procedure 1
Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board is replaced.
(Machine before starting repair) PC PC (Machine after a board is replaced)
Save the EVR data to a personal computer.
Download the saved data to a machine.
Procedure 2
Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM to the replaced board.
Remove the EEPROM and install it.
(Former board)
(New board)
Procedure 3
When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.
(Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired)
Download the data.
Save the data. (The same model of the same destination)
After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the respective items of the EVR data. (Refer to page 6-3 for the items to be checked.)
6-1
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards.
Adjusting items when replacing main parts When replacing main parts, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table. Block replacement Replaced parts Parts replacement
MA-420 board SE5501/5502 (YAW/PITCH sensor)
VC-307 board IC1301, X1301 (Timing generator)
VC-307 board IC2202 (Timing generator (EVF))
PD-188 board IC6002 (Timing generator (LCD))
VC-307 board IC3501 (DVD system controller)
VC-307 board IC2101 (Video IN/OUT AMP)
PD-188 board IC6001 (RGB driver (LCD))
VC-307 board IC2201 (RGB driver (EVF))
LB-084 board D5602 (Back light (EVF))
VC-307 board IC1302 (S/H, A/D conv.)
Color EVF block LCD902 (LCD panel)
CD-428 board IC5001 (CCD imager)
LCD block ND901 (Fluorescent tube)
LCD block LCD901 (LCD panel)
Adjustment Section
Adjustment
Initialization of A, B, C, Initialization of A, B, C, D page data D, E, F, 1F page data Initialization of E, F, 1F page data 36MHz origin oscillation adj. HALL adj. Flange back adj. Optical axis adj. Mechanical shutter adj. Camera Color reproduction adj. MAX GAIN adj. LV standard data input AWB standard data input Auto white balance adj. Steady shot check VCO adj. RGB AMP adj. Color EVF Contrast adj. White balance adj. VCO adj. Bright adj. Black limit adj. PSIG GRAY adj. LCD Contrast adj. Center level adj. V COM adj. White balance adj. S VIDEO OUT Y level adj. Video S VIDEO OUT chroma level adj.
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
z z
z z z z
Table. 6-1-1(1).
6-2
VC-307 board IC1901 (EVR)
Lens device
Base unit
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
Adjusting items when replacing a board or EEPROM When replacing a board or EEPROM, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table. Board replacement EEPROM replacement
VC-307 board IC3401 (Flash memory)
CD-428 board (COMPLETE)
VC-307 board (COMPLETE)
LB-084 board (COMPLETE)
PD-188 board (COMPLETE)
Adjustment Section
Adjustment
MD-097 board IC4702 (Flash memory)
VC-307 board IC3004 (EEPROM)
VC-307 board IC3302 (EEPROM)
MD-097 board IC4201 (EEPROM)
MA-420 board (COMPLETE)
MD-097 board (COMPLETE)
Initialization of A, B, C, Initialization of A, B, C, D page data D, E, F, 1F page data Initialization of E, F, 1F page data 36MHz origin oscillation adj. HALL adj. Flange back adj. Optical axis adj. Mechanical shutter adj. Camera Color reproduction adj. MAX GAIN adj. LV standard data input AWB standard data input Auto white balance adj. Steady shot check VCO adj. RGB AMP adj. Color EVF Contrast adj. White balance adj. VCO adj. Bright adj. Black limit adj. PSIG GRAY adj. LCD Contrast adj. Center level adj. V COM adj. White balance adj. S VIDEO OUT Y level adj. Video S VIDEO OUT chroma level adj.
z z z z z z z z
z z z z z z z z z
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
Table. 6-1-1(2).
6-3
Supportng
z z z z z z z z
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT (CAMERA SECTION)
Vectorscope Parts Code J-6080-058-A J-6080-808-A J-6080-806-A J-6080-807-A J-6082-200-A J-6020-250-A J-6082-053-B J-6080-875-A For checking the flange back J-6080-621-A For adjusting the color viewfinder J-6082-388-A For adjusting the LCD block For checking the base unit For extension between the MD-097 board (CN4901) and J-6082-352-A the VC-307 board (CN1008) J-6082-353-B For adjusting the flange back J-6082-384-A For adjusting the flange back J-3 J-4 J-5 Usage Auto white balance adjustment/check White balance adjustment/check White balance check White balance check White balance check
1-1-1. List of Service Tools Oscilloscope Color monitor Digital voltmeter Ref. No. J-1 J-2 J-3 J-4 J-5 J-6 J-7 J-8 J-9 J-10 J-11 J-1 Name Filter for color temperature correction (C14) ND filter 1.0 ND filter 0.4 ND filter 0.1 Pattern box PTB-450 Color chart for pattern box Adjustment remote commander (RM-95 upgraded) Siemens star chart Clear chart for pattern box CPC-8 jig Extension cable (100P, 0.5mm) Mini pattern box Camera table J-2
J-6
J-7
J-8
J-9
J-10
J-11
Fig. 6-1-1.
6-4
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
1-1-2.
Preparations
Pattern box
Note1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer to 2. DISASSEMBLY. Note2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block and boards need not be disassembled. Note3: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0, address: 10 is 00. If not, set data: 00 to this address.
1)
Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 6-1-3.
1.5 m
Note4: As removing the cabinet (R) assembly (removing CN1007 of the VC-307 board) means removing the lithium 3V power supply (BT5201 on the CK-127 board), data such as date, time, user-set menus will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. But the self-diagnosis data and the data on history of use (user initial power on date, final condensation occurrence data) will be kept even if the lithium 3V power supply is removed. (Refer to 6-3. Service Mode for the self-diagnosis data and the data on history of use.) Note5: Setting the Forced MOVIE mode. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button. The above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned on with the control switch block (PS-CX5500) removed. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the Forced MOVIE mode. Note6: Exiting the Forced MOVIE mode. 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Front of the lens
Fig. 6-1-2.
6-5
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
[CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT]
DC-IN connector Adjustment remote commander (RM-95) CPC lid (bottom) LANC jack Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 AC power adaptor AC IN
CPC-8 jig (J-6082-388-A)
Fig. 6-1-3.
6-6
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
1-1-3. Precaution 1. Setting the Switch Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments without loading cassette. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. MODE dial (PS-CX5500 block) ..................... MOVIE ( ) NIGHT SHOT (Lens block) ............................................ OFF COLOR SLOW S/ SUPER NS ........................................ OFF FOCUS (KP-CX5500 block) ................................ MANUAL BACK LIGHT (FB-220 board) ........................................ OFF STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ........................................ OFF PROGRAM AE (Menu setting) ................................... AUTO PICTURE EFECT (Menu setting) ................................... OFF DIGITAL EFECT (Menu setting) .................................... OFF WHITE BALANCE (Menu setting) ............................ AUTO 16:9 WIDE (Menu setting) .............................................. OFF
2. Order of Adjustments Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.
Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame )

Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red
H
Electronic beam scanning frame
C=D
Blue
Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue
CRT picture frame
V A B A=B B A Enlargement
Fig. b (TV monitor picture)
Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
Difference in level
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a and the TV monitor display shown in Fig. b.
Fig. 6-1-4.
3. Subjects 1) Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-4. (Color reproduction adjustment frame) 2) Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during this time.) 3) Flange back adjustment chart Make the chart shown in Fig. 6-1-5 using A0 size (1189mm 841mm) black and white vellum paper.
White 841mm Black
1189mm
Fig. 6-1-5.
Note: Use matte vellum paper bigger than A0, and make sure the edges of the black and white paper joined together are not rough.
6-7
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF A, B, C, D, E, F, 1F PAGE DATA
Note: When reading or writing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 01, then select F page. The 1F page can be chosen by this data setting. After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to 00.
1-2-1.
INITIALIZATION OF A, B, C, D PAGE DATA
Note: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
1. Initializing the A, B, C, D Page Data

Note1: Reading/writing the C page data by using the is impossible. Note2: If the B page data has been initialized, the following adjustments need to be performed again. 1) Viewfinder system adjustments 2) LCD system adjustments 3) Video system adjustments Note3: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 PAL model: DCR-DVD100E
2. Modification of A, B, C, D Page Data If the A, B, C or D page data has been initialized, change the data of the Fixed data-2 address of the initialized page shown in the following tables by manual input. Modifying Method: 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model.
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may not operate.
Adjusting page Adjusting Address Adjusting page Adjusting Address Adjusting page Adjusting Address Adjusting page Adjusting Address Initializing Method:
A 10 to FF B 30 to FF C 10 to FF D 10 to 75 3)
When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.
Processing after Completing Modification of A, B, C, D Page data Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 00 Set the data. 2 Turn off the power and turn on again
Note: If the following symptoms occur after completing of the Modification of A, B, C, D page data, check that the data of the Fixed data-2 addresses of A and D page are same as those of the same model of the same destination. 1) The self-diagnosis code E:20:00 on the LCD screen is displayed. 2) The power is shut off so that unit cannot operate.
Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 7 7 7 7 10 03 00 01 02 00 Set the data. Set the following data. 00(NTSC), 80(PAL) Set the data. (Note4) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. (Note4) Check that the data changes to 01 Perform Modification of A, B, C, D Page Data.
XX XX
Note4: XX=20 : Initializing A page XX=21 : Initializing B page XX=23 : Initializing D page XX=24 : Initializing C page XX=28 : Initializing A, B, C and D page
6-8
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
3. A Page Table
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to 1. Initializing the A, B, C, D Page Data.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of A, B, C, D Page Data).
4. B Page Table
Address 00 to 0F 10 to 17 Fixed data-1 18 Fixed data-2 19 to FF Fixed data-1
Remark
Address 00 to 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 to 40 41 42 43 44 to 47 48 49 to 4A 4B 4C to 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 to 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B to FF
Initial value
Remark
Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 S VIDEO out Y level adj. S VIDEO out chroma level adj. Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 VCO adj. (EVF) Fixed data-1 RGB AMP adj. (EVF) Fixed data-1 White balance adj. (EVF) Contrast adj. (EVF) Fixed data-1 VCO adj. (LCD) V COM adj. (LCD) Bright adj. (LCD) Black limit adj. (LCD) PSIG GRAY adj. (LCD) White balance adj. (LCD) Contrast adj. (LCD) Center level adj. (LCD) Fixed data-1
Table. 6-1-2.
88 9A 6E
68 80 97 8D 73 37 68 82 A2 A3 07 3E 7D 65 26 3D
Table. 6-1-3.
6-9
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5. C Page Table
Note1: Reading/writing the C page data by using the is impossible. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note3: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to 1. Initializing the A, B, C, D Page Data.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of A, B, C, D Page Data).
6. D Page Table
Address 00 to 0F 10 11 12 13 to 15 16 17 to 18 19 1A to 37 38 39 to 3E 3F 40 to 6E 6F 70 to 75
Initial value 00
Remark
Address 00 to 0F 10 to FF Fixed data-1
Remark
Table. 6-1-4.
Test mode Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1
Table. 6-1-5.
6-10
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
1-2-2.
INITIALIZATION OF E, F, 1F PAGE DATA
Note: When reading or writing the E, F page data, select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 00. When reading or writing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 01, then select F page. The 1F page can be chosen by this data setting. After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to 00.
2. Modification of E, F, 1F Page Data If the E, F, 1F page data has been initialized, change the data of the Fixed data-2 address shown in the following table by manual input. Modifying Method: 1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) When changing the E, F page data, select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 00. 3) When changing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 01. After completing the modification of 1F page data, reset the data of this address to 00. 4) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model.
Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the camcorder may not operate.
1. Initializing the E, F, 1F Page Data

Note1: If Initializing the E, F, 1F Page Data is performed, all data of the E page, F page and 1F page will be initialized. (It is impossible to initialize a single page.) Note2: If the E, F, 1F page data has been initialized, following adjustments need to be performed again. 1) Modification of E, F, 1F page data 2) Camera system adjustments Note3: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 PAL model: DCR-DVD100E
Adjusting page Adjusting Address Adjusting page Adjusting Address Adjusting page Adjusting Address
E 00 to FF F 10 to FF 1F 00 to F7
5)
6)
When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory. Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. If not, change the data to the initial value.
Processing after Completing Modification of E, F, 1F Page data Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 2 3 4 0 2 2 10 00 01 00 29 29 Set the data. Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Perform 36MHz Origin Osc. Adjustment of the camera system adjustment.
Initializing Method: Order Page Address Data 1 2 3 0 0 6 01 10 01 01 00
Procedure Set the data. Set the data. Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. 2D (NTSC), 2F (PAL) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to 01. Perform Modification of E, F, 1F Page Data.
4 5 6
6 6
03 02
01
3. E Page Table
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to 1. Initializing the E, F, 1F Page Data.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of E, F, 1F Page Data).
Address 00 to 13 14 15 16 17 18 to 26 27 28 to FF Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1
Remark
Table. 6-1-6.
6-11
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4. F Page Table
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to 1. Initializing the E, F, 1F Page Data.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of E, F, 1F Page Data).
Address Initial value NTSC PAL 00 to 0F 10 80 80 11 to 12 13 81 81 14 5D 5D 15 88 88 16 17 9A 9A 18 80 80 19 91 7A 1A 1B 1B 1B 00 00 1C 07 07 1D 00 00 1E 0E 0E 1F 00 00 20 0D 0D 21 00 00 22 23 22 22 24 25 27 24 26 to 29 2A 00 00 2B F1 EF 2E to 31 2E 2B 2A 2F C0 40 30 59 58 31 00 C0 32 19 19 33 51 51 34 20 20 35 22 22 36 13 13 37 93 93 38 00 00 39 00 00 3A 00 00 3B 00 00 3C 46 46 3D 19 19 3E 00 00 3F 2A 2A 40 00 00 41 00 00 42 00 00 43 to 45
Remark
36MHz origin osc. adj. Fixed data-1 HALL adj.
Fixed data-1 MAX GAIN adj. LV standard data input AWB standard data input
Auto white balance adj.
Fixed data-1 Color reproduction adj. Fixed data-1 Color reproduction adj. Fixed data-1 Color reproduction adj. Fixed data-1 Auto white balance adj.
Flange back adj.
Fixed data-1
Address Initial value NTSC PAL 46 FF FF 47 to 4B 4C 19 19 4D to 4F 50 80 80 51 80 80 52 80 80 53 80 80 54 80 80 55 80 80 56 40 40 57 00 00 58 34 34 59 00 00 5A 30 30 5B 00 00 5C 2A 2A 5D 00 00 5E 14 14 5F 00 00 60 70 70 61 80 80 62 80 80 63 80 80 64 80 80 65 1E 1E 66 to 83 84 85 86 to 89 8A 8B 8C to 8D 8E 8F to 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 to 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 to A3 A4 A5 to A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC
Remark Optical axis adj. Fixed data-1 HALL adj. Fixed data-1 Mechanical shutter adj.
Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2
6-12
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
F Page 5. 1F Page Table Address Initial value NTSC PAL AD to B6 B7 B8 B9 to BC BD BE BF C0 to C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 to CD CE CF D0 to E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 to EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF Remark Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2
Note1: When reading or writing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 01, then select F page. The 1F page can be chosen by this data setting. After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to 00. Note2: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to 1. Initializing the E, F, 1F Page Data.) Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to 2. Modification of E, F, 1F Page Data).
Address Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 (Modified data. Copy the data built in the same model.) 00 to 74 75 76 to D6 D7 D8 to F7 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1 Fixed data-2 Fixed data-1
Remark
Table. 6-1-8.
Table. 6-1-7.
6-13
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-3. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
2. HALL Adjustment For detecting the position of the lens iris and ND filter, adjust AMP gain and offset. Subject Not required Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value 1 Specified Value 2 Display data of page 1 (Note1) Adjustment remote commander F 13, 14, 15, 4C 15 to 19 88 to 8C Before perform the camera system adjustments (except for 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment), check that the specified values of VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS are satisfied. And check that the data of page: 0, address: 10 is 00. If not, set data: 00 to this address. 1. 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment (VC-307 board) Set the frequency of the clock for synchronization. If deviated, the synchronization will be disrupted and the color will become inconsistent. Subject Not required Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Pin qs of IC1301 Frequency counter F 10 f=18000000 90Hz
Note1: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : 00 : XX IRIS display data Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting: MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 3 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 94 95 01 02 01 00 17 8A 6D Set the data. Set the data.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1 2 0 F 01 10 01
Procedure Set the data. Change the data and set the frequency (f) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. Set the data.
3 4
F 0
10 01
00
VC-307 BOARD (SIDE B)
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to 01. (Note4) Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
24 25 36 37
13 12 1 48 IC1301
Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 13, 14, 15, 4C.
Checking method: Order Page Address Data 1 2 3 0 6 1 03 01 03 01
Procedure Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the IRIS display data (Note1) satisfies the specified value 1. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the IRIS display data (Note1) satisfies the specified value 2.
Fig. 6-1-6.
4 5
6 1
01
03
Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 6 0 0 94 95 01 03 01 00 00 00 00 00 Set the data. Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data. Set the data.
6-14
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
3. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Minipattern Box) The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during auto focusing/manual focusing. Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for the minipattern box (Note1) Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Adjustment remote commander F 32 to 42
Note1: Dark Siemens star chart. Note2: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of HALL Adjustment. Note3: Make the lens horizontal and perform this adjustment. Note4: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note5: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, turn off the power and turn on again.
Switch setting: ) 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF Preparations: 1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following figure.
Note: The attachment lenses are not used.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1 2 3 4 5 0 6 6 6 6 01 48 01 01 02 01 01 13 27
Procedure Set the data. Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. (Note3) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to 01. (Note6)
2) 3) 4) 5)
Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and the front of the lens of the camcorder is less than 3cm. Make the height of the minipattern box and the camcorder equal. Check that the output voltage of the regulated power supply is the specified voltage. Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end, the center of the Siemens star chart and center of the exposure screen coincide.
Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the minipattern box, so adjust the power supply output voltage to the specified voltage written on the sheet which is supplied with the minipattern box.
Below 3 cm Minipattern box Camcorder
Note6: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 32 to 42.
Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 2 3 4 6 0 48 01 00 00 Set the data. Set the data. Turn off the power and turn on again. Perform Flange Back Check.
Camera table Regulated power supply Output voltage : Specified voltage 0.01Vdc Output current : more than 3.5A
Red (+) Black () Yellow (SENS +) White (SENS ) Black (GND) Need not connected
Fig. 6-1-7.
6-15
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4. Flange Back Adjustment (Using Flange Back Adjustment Chart and Subject More Than 500m Away) The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during auto focusing/manual focusing. 4-1. Flange Back Adjustment (1) Subject Flange back adjustment chart (2.0 m from the front of the protection glass) (Luminance: 350 50 lux) Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Adjustment remote commander F 32 to 42 4-2. Flange Back Adjustment (2) Perform this adjustment after performing Flange Back Adjustment (1). Subject Subject more than 500m away (Subjects with clear contrast such as buildings, etc.) Check operation on TV monitor F 32 to 42
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of HALL Adjustment. Note2: Make the lens horizontal and perform this adjustment. Note3: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, turn off the power and turn on again.
Note1: Make the lens horizontal and perform this adjustment. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00, turn off the power and turn on again.
Switch setting: 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF Preparations: 1) Check that at both the zoom lens TELE end and WIDE end, the center of the chart for the flange back adjustment and center of the exposure screen coincide. Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1 2 3 4 5 0 6 6 6 6 01 48 01 01 02 01 01 13 15
Switch setting: ) 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF Preparations: 1) Set the zoom lens to the TELE end and expose a subject that is more than 500m away (subject with clear contrast such as building, etc.). (Nearby subjects less than 500m away should not be in the screen.) Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 3 4 5 6 6 6 01 02 29 6 6 48 01 01 13 Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. (Note2) Place a ND filter on the lens so that the optimum image is obtain. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to 01. (Note4)
Procedure Set the data. Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. (Note2) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to 01. (Note5)
Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 2 Turn off the power and turn on again. Perform Flange Back Adjustment (2)
Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 2 3 4 6 0 48 01 00 00 Set the data. Set the data. Turn off the power and turn on again. Perform Flange Back Check
6-16
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
5. Flange Back Check Subject Siemens star (2.0 m from the front of the lens) (Luminance : approx. 200 lux) Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value Check operation on TV monitor Focused at the TELE end and WIDE end.
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Switch setting: 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF

Note2: When the auto focus is ON, the lens can be checked if it is focused or not by observing the data on the page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 0F. 2) Page 1 shows the state of the focus. 1 : 00 : XX Odd: Focused Even: Unfocused
Checking method: 1) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 01. 3) Place the Siemens star 2.0m from the front of the lens. 4) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the Siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image. 5) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end. 6) Turn on the auto focus. 7) Check that the lens is focused (Note2). 8) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 10. 9) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end. 10) Observe the TV monitor and check that the lens is focused. Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: 6, address: 21, and set data: 00. 2) Select page: 6, address: 40, and set data: 00. 3) Select page: 6, address: 41, and set data: 00. 4) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 00.
6-17
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
6. Optical Axis Adjustment Align the lens Optical Axis with that of the CCD imager. If deviated, center of picture can lose focus when zoom is operated from the WIDE end to the TELE end. Subject Siemens star Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Check on the monitor TV F 46
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Flange back adjustment. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 48 is 00. If not, set data: 00 to this address. Note4: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 PAL model: DCR-DVD100E
Area 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Display phase 22.6 to 67.5 67.6 to 112.5 112.6 to 157.5 157.6 to 202.5 202.6to 247.5 247.6 to 292.5 292.6 to 337.5 337.6 to 22.5
Switch setting: 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) 2) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 3) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF Preparations before adjustments: 1) Connect a DV camcorder to the monitor TV. 2) Playback the monoscope segment of the DV system check tape (XH5-5 (NTSC), XH5-5P (PAL),). 3) Attach the optical axis frame chart (transparent) on the monitor TV screen. Center of monoscope image and that of optical axis frame must be agree. 4) Disconnect the DV camcorder from the monitor TV, and connect the DVD camcorder to the monitor TV. Adjusting method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: F, address: 46, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. 3) Place the Siemens star 2.0 m away from the front of the lens. 4) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end. 5) Point the lens toward the Siemens star chart until center of the Siemens star is located in the center of the optical axis frame. 6) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end. 7) Measure on the monitor TV screen in which area of the optical axis frame the center of the Siemens star is located. Measure the amount of displacement (distance between the center of the Siemens star and the center of the optical axis frame.) The measurement value is named L1. 8) Read the correction data corresponding to the area from Table 6-1-9. 9) Input the correction data to page: F, address: 46, and press the PAUSE button 10) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end. 11) Point the lens toward the Siemens star chart until center of the Siemens star is located in the center of the optical axis frame. 12) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom WIDE end. 13) Measure the amount of displacement (distance between the center of the Siemens star and the center of the optical axis frame.) The measurement value is named L2. 14) Compare the values L1 and L2, and confirm that L2 is smaller than L1. If L2 is lager than L1, select page: F, address: 46, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Correction data (Page: F, address: 46) 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Table 6-1-9.
Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Fig. 6-1-8.
6-18
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
7. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment Adjustment Page Adjustment Address F 50 to 65
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note2: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 PAL model: DCR-DVD100E
Adjusting method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Input the following data to page: F, addresses: 50 to 65.
Note: Press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data.
Address 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 64 65 3)
Data NTSC 80 80 80 80 80 80 40 00 34 00 30 00 2A 00 14 00 70 80 80 80 80 1E PAL 80 80 80 80 80 80 40 00 34 00 30 00 2A 00 14 00 70 80 80 80 80 1E
Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
6-19
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
8. Picture Frame Setting Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) (1.5m from the front of the lens) Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value Video terminal of AUDIO/ VIDEO jack Oscilloscope and TV monitor A=B, C=D, E=F
Note1: The following adjustments should be carried out upon completion of Flange back adjustment and Optical Axis Adjustment. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Check on the oscilloscope 1. Horizontal period

A=B B A C=D C D
Switch setting: ) 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF Setting method: 1) Select page: 6, address: 48, and set data: 02. 2) Adjust the zoom and the camera direction, and set to the specified position. 3) Mark the position of the picture frame on the monitor display, and adjust the picture frame to this position in following adjustments using Color reproduction adjustment frame. Processing after Completing Camera System Adjustments: After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data settings. 1) Select page: 6, address: 48, and set data: 00.
Fig. 6-1-9. 2. Vertical period

E E=F F
Fig. 6-1-10. Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
Color bar chart picture frame
Monitor TV picture frame
Fig. 6-1-11.
6-20
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
9. Color Reproduction Adjustment Adjust the color Separation matrix coefficient so that proper color reproduction is produced. Subject Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack Vectorscope F 23, 25, 2A, 2B All color luminance points should settle within each color reproduction frame.
For NTSC model
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Flange back adjustment and Optical Axis Adjustment. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note3: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 PAL model: DCR-DVD100E
Switch setting: ) 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF Adjusting method: 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 6, address: 48, and set data: 02. 3) Select page: 6, address: 9D, and set data: 25. 4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 3D, and press the PAUSE button. 5) Select page: F, address: 80, set the following data, and press the PAUSE button. 37 (NTSC), B7 (PAL) 6) Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of the vectorscope, and adjust the burst luminance point to the burst position of the color reproduction frame. 7) Change the data of page: F, address: 23, 25, 2A and 2B, and settle each color luminance point in each color reproduction frame.
Note: Be sure to press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander before changing the addresses. If not, the new data will not be written to the memory.
Burst position
For PAL model Burst position
Processing after Completing Adjustments: 1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. 2) Select page: 6, address: 48, and set data: 00. 3) Select page: 6, address: 9D, and set data: 00. 4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Fig. 6-1-12.
6-21
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
10. MAX GAIN Adjustment Setting the minimum illumination. If it is not consistent, the image level required for taking subjects in low illuminance will not be produced (dark). Subject Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Adjustment Page Adjustment Address F 17
11. LV Standard Data Input And adjust the normal coefficient of the light value. Subject Clear chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame) Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Display data of page 1 (Note4) Adjustment remote commander F 18, 19 0FB0 to 1050
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Flange back adjustment and Optical Axis Adjustment. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.
Switch setting: ) 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 48 2C 96 97 01 02 6F 02 01 Set the data. Set the data. Set the following data. 28 (NTSC), 1C (PAL) Set the following data. 80 (NTSC), 00 (PAL) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to 01. (Note4)
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Flange back adjustment, Optical Axis Adjustment, Color reproduction adjustment and MAX GAIN Adjustment. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Note4: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX Display data
Switch setting: 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 6 6 6 0 1 01 48 01 02 03 1E 01 02 0D
Procedure Set the data. Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to 01. (Note5) Set the data. Check that the display data (Note5) satisfies the specified value.
Note4: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 17.
Processing after Completing Adjustments Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 6 2C 00 Set the data. 2 3 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 0 48 96 97 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 18, 19.
Processing after Completing Adjustments Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2 3 4 5 6 0 0 48 03 01 00 00 00 Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Perform Auto White Balance Standard Data Input.
6-22
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
12. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame) When performing Auto White Balance Standard Data Input, Auto White Balance Adjustment and White Balance Check, set the picture frame to All white frame. Subject Clear chart (All white frame) (1.5m from the front of the lens) Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack TV monitor (Under scan mode) Whole of the screen is white
13. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input Adjust the white balance reference at 3200K. Subject Clear chart (All white frame) (Note4) Adjustment Page Adjustment Address F 1A to 1D
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Color Reproduction Adjustment. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Note4: Perform 12. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame) before this adjustment.
Switch setting: 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF Setting method: Order Page Address Data 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 6 6 6 6 6 48 90 91 92 93 01 02 2D 03 8E 26 79
Switch setting: ) 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 6 48 02 Set the data. 2 Check that the whole of the screen is white. If not, perform 12. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame). Set the data. Wait for more than 2 sec. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to 01. (Note5) Perform Auto White Balance Adjustment.
Procedure Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the whole of the screen is white. Perform the following adjustments.
3 4 5 6 7 8
0 6 6 6
01 01 01 02
01 11 0B
Processing after Completing Adjustments After completing Auto White Balance Standard Data Input, Auto White Balance Adjustment and White Balance Check, release the data setting. Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 6 48 00 Set the data. 2 3 4 5 6 6 6 6 90 91 92 93 00 00 00 00 Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data.
Note5: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 1A to 1D.
6-23
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
14. Auto White Balance Adjustment Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data. If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will be poor. Subject Clear chart (All white frame) Filter Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Filter C14 for color temperature correction Display data of page 1 (Note3) Adjustment remote commander F 1E to 21, 2E to 31 R ratio : 2B80 to 2C00 (NTSC) 2B80 to 2C00 (PAL) B ratio : 58C0 to 5940 (NTSC) 58C0 to 5940 (PAL)
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1 2 6 48 02
Procedure Set the data. Check that the whole of the screen is white. If not, perform 12. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame). Place the C14 filter for color temperature correction on the lens. Set the data. Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. 2B (NTSC), 2B (PAL) Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. C0 (NTSC), C0 (PAL) Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. 59 (NTSC), 59 (PAL) Set the following data, and press PAUSE button. 00 (NTSC), 00 (PAL)
3 4 5 0 F 01 2E 01
2F
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of Auto White Balance Standard Data Input. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note3: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is 00. If not, to page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button. Note4: Displayed data of page 1 of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX
30
31
Display data
Note5: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 PAL model: DCR-DVD100E
9 10 11 12 13 14
6 6 6 6 0 1
01 01 02 01 03
83 81
Switch setting: 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( ) 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL 4) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 5) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF
Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the data changes to 01. (Note6) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data. Check that the display data (Note4) satisfies the R ratio specified value. Set the data. Check that the display data (Note4) satisfies the B ratio specified value.
3F 04
15 16
0 1
03
05
Note6: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: F, address: 1E to 21, 2E to 31.
Processing after Completing Adjustments: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 6 01 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6 6 6 6 6 0 0 48 90 91 92 93 01 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Perform White Balance Check.
6-24
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
15. White Balance Check Subject Clear chart (All white frame) (Note2) Filter Filter C14 for color temperature correction ND filter 1.0 and 0.4 and 0.1 Video terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack Vectorscope Fig. 6-1-13. A to B
Processing after Completing Adjustments Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 0 01 48 90 91 92 93 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data. Set the data.
Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note2: Perform 12. Picture Frame Setting (All White Frame).
Switch setting: ) 1) MODE ............................................................. MOVIE ( 2) NIGHT SHOT .................................................................. OFF 3) DIGITAL ZOOM (Menu setting) .................................... OFF 4) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ...................................... OFF Checking method: Order Page Address Data 1 2 3 4 6 6 48 01 02 0F Procedure Indoor white balance check Check that the lens is not covered with either filter. Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the center of the white luminance point is within the circle shown Fig. 6-1-13. A. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Outdoor white balance check Place the C14 filter on the lens. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the center of the white luminance point is within the circle shown Fig. 6-1-13. B. Remove the C14 filter. LV data check Place the ND filter 1.5 (1.0+0.1+0.4) on the lens. 6 0 1 01 03 00 06 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data. Check that the display data (Note3) satisfies the specified value. Specified value: 8000 to 8BC0
2mm
R-Y
2mm
B-Y
01
00
Fig. 6-1-13 (A).
6 7 8
01
3F
1mm 0.5mm
R-Y
B-Y 3mm 3mm
9 10 11 12 13
Fig. 6-1-13 (B).
Note3: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX Display data
6-25
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
16. Steady Shot Check Precautions on the Parts Replacement There are two types of repair parts. Type A: ENC03MA Type B: ENC03MB Replace the broken sensor with a same type sensor. If replace with other type parts, the image will vibrate up and down or left and right during hand-shake correction operations. Precautions on Angular Velocity Sensor The sensor incorporates a precision oscillator. Handle it with care as if it dropped, the balance of the oscillator will be disrupted and operations will not be performed properly. Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value Display data of page 1 (Note1) Adjustment remote commander 2B00 to 4B00
Note1: Displayed data of the adjustment remote commander. 1 : XX : XX Display data Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Switch setting: 1) STEADY SHOT (Menu setting) ....................................... ON 2) ZOOM .................................................................... TELE end Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data
Procedure Pitch sensor check (MA-420 board SE5502) Set the data. Check that the display data (Note1) satisfies the specified value. (Note3) Yaw sensor check (MA-420 board SE5501)
1 2
0 1
03
11
3 4
0 1
03
12
Set the data. Check that the display data (Note1) satisfies the specified value. (Note3) Set the data. Move the camcorder, and check that the steady shot operations have been performed normally
5 6
03
00
Note3: Dont move the camcoder.
6-26
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-4. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages caused by static electricity. Note2: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0, address: 10 is 00. If not, set data: 00 to this address. Note3: As the PANEL CLOSE switch is attached to the cabinet (R), this cabinet must be attached when performing adjustments. If you perform the adjustments with cabinet (R) removed, set the following data. 1) Select page: 3, address: 00, and set data: 00. 2) Select page: 3, address: 02, set data: 02, and press PAUSE button. Reset the data after completing adjustment. 1) Select page: 3, address: 00, and set data: 00. 2) Select page: 3, address: 02, set data: 00, and press PAUSE button. Note4: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 PAL model: DCR-DVD100E
Remove the CPC lid (bottom).
Switch setting: LCD panel .................................................................... Closed [Adjusting connector] Most of the measuring points for adjusting the viewfinder system are concentrated in CN1003 of VC-307 board. Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-8 jig (J-6082-388A). The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN1003. Pin No.
19 1
Pin No. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19
Signal Name GND PANEL VG XHD/PSIG EVF VCO D 3.1V MS XIN MS BS MS SCLK C PIO5 S TXD
Pin No. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Signal Name GND H START EVF VG EVF BL LANC SIG MS DIO MS VCC ON ACCESS LED C PIO4 S RXD
20
Fig. 6-1-14.
Table 6-1-10.
6-27
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
1. VCO Adjustment (VC-307 board) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the EVF screen will be blurred. Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Pin 7 of CN1003 (EVF VCO) Frequency counter B 51, 52 f = 15734 30Hz (NTSC) f = 15625 30Hz (PAL)
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note2: Refer to Table 6-3-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table.
Adjusting method for NTSC model: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 51 Change the data and set the VCO frequency (f) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. Read the data, and this data is named D51. Convert D51 to decimal notation, and obtain D51. (Note2) Calculate D52 using following equations (Decimal calculation) When D51 231 D52 = D51 + 24 When D51 > 231 D52 = 255 Convert D 52 to a hexadecimal number, and obtain D52. (Note2) B 0 52 01 D52 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
Adjusting method for PAL model: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 52 Change the data and set the VCO frequency (f) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. Read the data, and this data is named D52. Convert D52 to decimal notation, and obtain D52. (Note2) Calculate D51 using following equations (Decimal calculation) When D52 24 D51 = D52 24 When D52 < 24 D51 = 0 Convert D51 to a hexadecimal number, and obtain D51. (Note2) B 0 51 01 D51 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
3 4 5 6
B B
51 51
3 4 5 6
B B
52 52
7 8 9
7 8 9
6-28
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2. RGB AMP Adjustment (VC-307 board) Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Pin 6 of CN1003 (EVF VG) Oscilloscope B 54 A = 7.20 0.10V
3. Contrast Adjustment (VC-307 board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Pin 6 of CN1003 (EVF VG) Oscilloscope B 58 A = 2.50 0.10V
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 54 Change the data and set the voltage (A) between the reversed waveform pedestal and nonreversed waveform pedestal to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. 00 Set the data.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 58 Change the data and set the voltage (A) between the 100 IRE and 0 IRE (pedestal) to the specified value. (The data should be 00 to 7F.) Press PAUSE button. 00 Set the data.
3 4
B 0
54 01
3 4
B 0
58 01
Pedestal
100 IRE
2H
2H Pedestal
Pedestal
Fig. 6-1-15.
Fig. 6-1-16.
6-29
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4. White Balance Adjustment (VC-307 board) Correct the white balance. If deviated, the reproduction of the EVF screen may degenerate. Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Check on EVF screen B 56, 57 The EVF screen should not be colored.
Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts. If necessary, adjust them. 1. LCD panel 2. Light induction plate 3. IC2201 Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 3 4 B B B 56 57 57 8D 73 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the EVF screen is not colored. If not colored, proceed to step 10. Change the data so that the EVF screen is not colored. Press PAUSE button. Change the data so that the EVF screen is not colored. Press PAUSE button. If the EVF screen is colored, repeat steps 5 to 9. 00 Set the data.
5 6 7 8 9 10
B B B B B 0
56 56 57 57 57 01
6-30
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
1. VCO Adjustment (PD-188 board) Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will be blurred. Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Pin 4 of CN1003 of VC-307 board (H START) Frequency counter B 61, 62 f = 15734 30Hz (NTSC) f = 15625 30Hz (PAL)
Note1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven by a high voltage AC power supply. Therefore, do not touch the back light holder to avoid electrical shock. Note2: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages caused by static electricity. Note3: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0, address: 10 is 00. If not, set data: 00 to this address. Note4: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 PAL model: DCR-DVD100E
Switch setting: LCD panel ............................................................................. Open [Adjusting connector] Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are concentrated in CN1003 of the VC-307 board. Connect the measuring instruments via the multi CPC-8 jig (J-6082-388-A). The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN1003. Pin No. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 Signal Name GND PANEL VG XHD/PSIG EVF VCO D 3.1V MS XIN MS BS MS SCLK C PIO5 S TXD Pin No. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Signal Name GND H START EVF VG EVF BL LANC SIG MS DIO MS VCC ON ACCESS LED C PIO4 S RXD
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note2: Refer to Table 6-3-1. Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table.
Adjusting method for NTSC model: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 61 Change the data and set the VCO frequency (f) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. Read the data, and this data is named D61. Convert D61 to decimal notation, and obtain D61. (Note2) Calculate D62 using following equations (Decimal calculation) When D61 229 D62 = D61 + 26 When D61 > 229 D62 = 255 Convert D62 to a hexadecimal number, and obtain D62. (Note2) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
3 4 5 6
B B
61 61
Table 6-1-11.
Remove the CPC lid (bottom).
7 8 9 B 0 62 01 D62 00
Adjusting method for PAL model: Order Page Address Data 1 2 0 B 01 62 01
Procedure
Set the data. Change the data and set the VCO frequency (f) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. Read the data, and this data is named D62. Convert D62 to decimal notation, and obtain D62. (Note2) Calculate D61 using following equations (Decimal calculation) When D62 26 D61 = D62 26 When D62 < 26 D61 = 0 Convert D61 to a hexadecimal number, and obtain D61. (Note2) Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
19
3 4 5 6
B B
62 62
20
Fig. 6-1-17.
7 8 9 B 0 61 01 D61 00
6-31
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2. Bright Adjustment (PD-188 board) Set the D range of the RGB decoder used to drive the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will become blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Pin 3 of CN1003 of VC-307 board (PANEL VG) Oscilloscope B 64 A = 7.58 0.05V (NTSC) A = 7.46 0.05V (PAL)
3. Black Limit Adjustment (PD-188 board) Set the video signal level for driving the LCD driver to an appropriate level. Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Pin 5 of CN1003 of VC-307 board (PSIG) Oscilloscope B 65 A = 8.30 0.08V
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 64 Change the data and set the voltage (A) between the reversed waveform pedestal and nonreversed waveform pedestal to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. 00 Set the data.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data 1 2 0 B 01 65 01
Procedure Set the data. Change the data and set the PSIG signal amplitude (A) to the specified value. (The data should be 00 to 0F) Press PAUSE button. Set the data.
3 4
B 0
65 01
00
3 4
B 0
64 01
Pedestal
A
Fig. 6-1-19.
A
2H Pedestal
Fig. 6-1-18.
6-32
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
4. PSIG GLAY Adjustment (PD-188 board) Set the PSIG signal level to an appropriate level. Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Pin 5 of CN1003 of VC-307 board (PSIG) Oscilloscope B 66 A = 5.00 0.05V
5. Contrast Adjustment (PD-188 board) Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish). Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Pin 3 of CN1003 of VC-307 board (PANEL VG) Oscilloscope B 69 A = 2.60 0.05V (NTSC) A = 2.58 0.05V (PAL)
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 66 Change the data and set the PSIG signal level (A) to the specified value. (The data should be 00 to 7F.) Press PAUSE button. 00 Set the data. 3 4 5 B 0 69 01
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 69 Change the data and set the voltage (A) between the 100 IRE and 0 IRE (pedestal) to the specified value. (The data should be 00 to 7F.) Press PAUSE button. 00 Set the data. Check that the specified value of Bright Adjustment is satisfied. If not, perform Bright Adjustment.
3 4
B 0
66 01
2H
100 IRE
Fig. 6-1-20.
2H Pedestal
Fig. 6-1-21.
6-33
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
6. Center Level Adjustment (PD-188 board) Set the video signal center level of LCD panel to an appropriate level. Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Pin 3 of CN1003 of VC-307 board (PANEL VG) Digital voltmeter B 6A A = 7.00 0.03Vdc
7. V COM Adjustment (PD-188 board) Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and conspicuous vertical lines. Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Check on LCD display B 63 The brightness difference between the section A and section B is minimum.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 6A Change the data and set the DC voltage (A) to the specified value. (The data should be 00 to 7F.) Press PAUSE button. 00 Set the data.
Note1: This adjustment should be carried out upon completion of the following adjustments. Bright Adjustment Black Limit Adjustment Contrast Adjustment Center Level Adjustment Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
3 4
B 0
6A 01
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 B 63 Change the data so that the brightness of the section A and that of the section B is equal. (Note3) Subtract 2 from the data. (Note3) 00 Press PAUSE button. Set the data.
3 4 5
B B 0
63 63 01
Note3: The data should be 80 to BF.
Fig. 6-1-22.
6-34
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
8. White Balance Adjustment (PD-188 board) Correct the white balance. If deviated, the reproduction of the LCD screen may degenerate. Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Check on LCD screen B 67, 68 The LCD screen should not be colored.
Note1: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts. If necessary, adjust them. 1. LCD panel 2. Light induction plate 3. IC6001 Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 3 4 B B B 67 68 68 7D 65 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the LCD screen is not colored. If not colored, proceed to step 10. Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored. Press PAUSE button. Change the data so that the LCD screen is not colored. Press PAUSE button. If the LCD screen is colored, repeat steps 5 to 9. 00 Set the data.
5 6 7 8 9 10
B B B B B 0
67 67 68 68 68 01
6-35
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
6-2. VIDEO SECTION ADJUSTMENT
2-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS
Use the following measuring instruments for video section adjustments. 2-1-1. 1) 2) Equipment to Required
TV monitor Oscilloscope (dual-phenomenon, band width above 30 MHz with delay mode) (Unless specified otherwise, use a 10:1 probe.) 3) Frequency counter 4) Pattern generator with video output terminal 5) Audio generator 6) Audio level meter 7) Audio distortion meter 8) Audio attenuator 9) Adjustment remote commander (J-6082-053-B) 10) Extension cable (100P 0.5mm) (J-6082-352-A) For extension between the MD-097 board (CN4902) and the VC-307 board (CN1008) 11) CPC-8 jig (J-6082-388-A)
6-36
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
2-1-2. 1)
Precautions on Adjusting
Note1: Before performing the adjustments, check the data of page: 0, address: 10 is 00. If not, set data: 00 to this address.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
The adjustments of this unit are performed in the PLAY mode or MOVIE mode. To set to the PLAY mode, set the mode dial to PLAY/EDIT ( ) or set the Forced PLAY mode using the adjusting remote commander (Note2). To set to the MOVIE mode, set the mode dial to MOVIE ( ) or set the Forced MOVIE mode using the adjusting remote commander (Note3). After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the Forced MOVIE Mode or Forced Camera Power ON Mode. (Note5) The front panel block (Microphones, MA-420 board (S VIDEO jack, remote commander receiver, infrared LED, angular velocity sensors)) need not be connected except for the case that the S VIDEO jack is used. To remove it, disconnect the following connector. MA-420 board CN5503 (22P, 0.5mm) Cabinet (R) (CK-127 board, LCD block) need not be connected. But removing the cabinet (R) (disconnecting the VC-307 board CN1007) means removing the lithium 3V power supply (CK127 board, BT5201), data such as date, time, user-set menus will be lost. After completing adjustments, reset these data. But, the self-diagnosis data and the data on history of use (user initial power on date, final condensation occurrence data) will be kept even if the cabinet (R) has been removed. (Refer to 63.Service Mode for the data on the history use and the selfdiagnosis data.) To remove the cabinet (R), disconnect the following connectors. VC-307 board CN1007 (39P, 0.3mm) The EVF block (LB-084 board) need not be connected. To remove it, disconnect the following connector. VC-307 board CN2201 (20P, 0.5mm) The intelligent accessory shoe need not be connected. To remove it, disconnect the following connector. VC-307 board CN1001 (10P, 0.5mm) The lens block (CD-428 board) need not be connected. To remove it, disconnect the following connectors. VC-307 board CN1301 (24P, 0.5mm) VC-307 board CN1201 (24P, 0.5mm) VC-307 board CN1010 (2P, 0.8mm) By setting the Forced PLAY mode or the Forced MOVIE mode, the video section can be operate even if the control switch block (PS-CX5500) has been removed. When removing it, disconnect the following connector. VC-307 board CN1002 (14P, 0.5mm) To open the VC-307 board, use the following extension cable between the VC-307 board CN1008 and MD-097 board CN4901. J-6082-352-A (100P, 0.5mm)
Note2: Setting the Forced PLAY mode (PLAY/EDIT mode) 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 02, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.
The above procedure will enable the power to be turned on with the control switch block (PS-CX5500 block) removed. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the Forced PLAY mode.
Note3: Setting the Forced MOVIE mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.
The above procedure will enable the power to be turned on with the control switch block (PS-CX5500 block) removed. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the Forced MOVIE mode.
Note4: Setting the Forced STILL mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 05, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.
The above procedure will enable the memory power to be turned on with the control switch block (PS-CX5500 block) removed. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the Forced STILL mode.
Note5: Exiting the Forced mode 1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander. 3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.
6-37
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
2-1-3. Adjusting Connectors The checkpoints of the base unit are concentrated at CN4902 of MD-097 board. When using an oscilloscope, connect it via the CPC8 jig (J-6082-388-A). The following table lists the pin numbers and signal names of CN4902. Pin No. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 Signal Name MON9 VRD PLCK REG GND XCS DD HI EVER SO HI EVER SCK P97 TEST TE0 REG GND Pin No. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 Signal Name DSU/RXD3 TXD3 RXD0 TXD0 XHELIO_RESET TEST FE0 TEST RFOP JIG UNREG TEST RFON VTR CAM DD ON
CN4902 20 19
Note: Playback RF signal : Pins qf, qk Focus error signal : Pin qs Tracking error signal : Pin qj
Remove the CPC lid (BT).
Fig 6-2-1.
Table 6-2-1.
2-1-4. Connecting the Equipment Connect the measuring instruments as shown in Fig. 6-2-2, and perform the adjustments.
Recording mode
Pattern generator Video output (75 ) AUDIO/VIDEO jack VIDEO (Yellow) AUDIO L (White) AUDIO R (Red)
Main unit
LANC jack Adjustment remote commander Adjustment remote commander
Playback mode
LANC jack
TV monitor VIDEO (Yellow) Main unit AUDIO L (White)
AUDIO R (Red) AUDIO/VIDEO jack
Fig 6-2-2.
6-38
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
2-1-5. Input/Output Level and Impedance Video input/output Special stereo mini jack Video signal: 1 Vp-p, 75 unbalanced, sync negative S video input/output 4-pin mini DIN Luminance signal : 1 Vp-p, 75 unbalanced, sync negative Chrominance signal : 0.286 Vp-p, 75 unbalanced (NTSC) : 0.300 Vp-p, 75 unbalanced (PAL) Audio input/output Special stereo mini jack Input level : 327 mV Input impedance : More than 47 k Output level : 327 mV (at load impedance 47 k Output impedance : Below 2.2 k
6-39
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
2-2. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Note1: efore perform the video system adjustments, check that the specified value of 36MHz Origin Oscillation Adjustment of CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT is satisfied. And check that the data of page: 0, address: 10 is 00. If not, set data: 00 to this address. Note2: NTSC model: DCR-DVD100 PAL model: DCR-DVD100E
2. S VIDEO OUT Chroma Level Adjustment (VC-307 Board) Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Arbitrary Chroma signal terminal of S VIDEO jack (75 terminated) External trigger: Y signal terminal of S VIDEO jack Oscilloscope B 42, 43 Cr level : A = 714 14mV (NTSC) A = 700 14mV (PAL) Cb level : B = 714 14mV (NTSC) B = 700 14mV (PAL) Burst level : C = 286 6mV (NTSC) C = 300 6mV (PAL)
1. S VIDEO OUT Y Level Adjustment (VC-307 Board) Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value Arbitrary Y signal terminal of S VIDEO jack (75 terminated) Oscilloscope B 41 A = 1000 14mV
Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page Adjustment Address Specified Value
Switch setting: DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ........................................ OFF Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 3 4 3 3 B 00 04 41 00 02 Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Change the data and set the Y signal level (A) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. 00 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Set the data.
Switch setting: DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ........................................ OFF Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 0 01 01 Set the data. 2 3 4 3 3 B 00 04 42 00 02 Set the data. Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Change the data and set the Cr signal level (A) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. Change the data and set the Cb signal level (B) to the specified value. Press PAUSE button. 00 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the burst signal level (C) is satisfied the specified value. Set the data.
H
5 6
B B
42 43
5 6 7
B 3 0
41 04 01
7 8 9 10
B 3
43 04
01
00
Fig. 6-2-3.
0.28 sec (NTSC) 0.23 sec (PAL)
0.28 sec (NTSC) 0.23 sec (PAL)
Fig. 6-2-4.
6-40
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
3. VIDEO OUT Y, Chroma Level Check (VC-307 Board) Mode MOVIE ( ) Subject Measurement Point Measuring Instrument Specified Value Arbitrary Video terminal of AUDIO VIDEO jack (75 terminated) Oscilloscope Sync level : A = 286 18mV (NTSC) A = 300 18mV (PAL) Burst level : B = 286 18mV (NTSC) B = 300 18mV (PAL)
Switch setting: DEMO MODE (Menu setting) ........................................ OFF Adjusting method: Order Page Address Data Procedure 1 3 00 00 Set the data. 2 3 4 5 3 04 00 3 04 02 Set the data, and press PAUSE button. Check that the sync signal level (A) satisfies the specified value. Check that the burst signal level (B) satisfies the specified value. Set the data, and press PAUSE button.
B A
Fig. 6-2-5.
6-41
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
2-3. AUDIO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
1. Overall Level Characteristics Check Mode PLAY ( ) mode Recording and playback Signal 400Hz, -7.5dBs signal: AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack Audio level meter -7.5 1.0dBs
Switch setting: REC MODE (DISC SET of Menu setting) ........................ LP

Note: Reset to SP, after completing adjustments.
Type of disc to use: DVD-R [Connection of Audio System Measuring Devices] Connect the audio system measuring devices as shown in Fig. 6-2-6.
Note: In recording mode, input a color bar signal to the video input.
Recording
Pattern generator Video output (75 ) Video (Yellow)
Checking Method 1) Input the 400Hz, -7.5dBs signal in the AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal. 2) Record the signal. 3) Playback the recorded section. 4) Check that the 400Hz signal level is the specified value. 2. Overall Distortion Check Mode
Main unit
Audio oscillator
600
Left (White) Right (Red)
AUDIO/VIDEO
PLAY ( ) mode Recording and playback 400Hz, -7.5dBs signal: AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack Audio distortion meter Below 0.4% (200Hz to 6kHz BPF ON)
Signal
Attenuator
600 : 270 (1-249-410-11) + 330 (1-249-411-11)
Playback
Main unit Video (Yellow) AUDIO/VIDEO Left (White) 47k Right (Red) 47k 47k (1-249-437-11) Audio level meter or Distortion meter TV monitor
Checking Method 1) Input the 400Hz, -7.5dBs signal in the AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal. 2) Record the signal. 3) Playback the recorded section. 4) Check that the distortion is the specified value. 3. Overall Noise Level Check Mode Signal PLAY ( ) mode Recording and playback No signal: AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal of AUDIO/VIDEO jack Audio level meter Below -45dBs (IHF-A filter ON, 20kHz LPF ON)
Fig. 6-2-6.
[How to record the line input signal] ). 1) Set the mode dial to PLAY/EDIT ( 2) Press the VISUAL INDEX button so that the line input video signal is displayed on the LCD screen 3) Press the REC button.
Checking Method 1) Insert shorting plugs in each of AUDIO L and AUDIO R terminal. 2) Record the signal. 3) Remove the shorting plugs. 4) Playback the recorded section. 5) Check that the noise level is the specified value.
6-42
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
COVER
6-3. SERVICE MODE
3-1. ADJUSTMENT REMOTE COMMANDER
The adjustment remote commander is used for changing the calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The adjustment remote commander performs bi-directional communication with the unit using the remote commander signal line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written in the non-volatile memory. 1. Using the adjustment remote commander 1) Connect the adjustment remote commander to the LANC terminal. 2) Set the HOLD switch of the adjustment remote commander to HOLD (SERVICE position). If it has been properly connected, the LCD on the adjustment remote commander will display as shown in Fig. 6-3-1. 2. Precautions upon using the adjustment remote commander Mishandling of the adjustment remote commander may erase the correct adjustment data at times. To prevent this, it is recommended that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments and new adjustment data after each adjustment.
Page
Data
Address
Fig. 6-3-1
3) Operate the adjustment remote commander as follows. Changing the page The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH+ button is pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH button is pressed. There are altogether 17 pages, from 0 to F, 1F. (Note)
Hexadecimal 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F notation LCD Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c d E F Decimal notation conversion value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 1314 15 Changing the address The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed, and decreases when the REW (m) button is pressed. There are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF. Changing the data (Data setting) The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed, and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF. Writing the adjustment data The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment data (8, A, B, C, D, E, F, 1F page) in the nonvolatile memory. (The new adjusting data will not be recorded in the nonvolatile memory if this step is not performed.) After completing all adjustments, turn off the main power supply once.
Note: When reading or writing the 1F page data, select page: 0, address: 10, and set data: 01, then select F page. The 1F page can be chosen by this data setting. After reading or writing, reset the data of page: 0, address: 10 to 00.
4)
6-43
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
COVER
3-2. DATA PROCESS
The calculation of the DDS display and the adjustment remote commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case, after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation, calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it as the adjustment data. Indicates the hexadecimal-decimal conversion table.
Hexadecimal-decimal Conversion Table

Lower digit of hexadecimal Upper digit of hexadecimal
2
4 5 6 7 8 9 A (A) 10 26 42 58 74 90 106 122 138 154 170 186 202 218 234 250 B (b) 11 27 43 59 75 91 107 123 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251 C (c) 12 28 44 60 76 92 108 124 140 156 172 188 204 220 236 252 D (d) 13 29 45 61 77 93 109 125 141 157 173 189 205 221 237 253 E (E) 14 30 46 62 78 94 110 126 142 158 174 190 206 222 238 254 F (F) 15 31 47 63 79 95 111 127 143 159 175 191 207 223 239 255
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A (A)
0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240
1 17 33 49 65 81 97 113 129 145 161 177 193 209 225 241
2 18 34 50 66 82 98 114 130 146 162 178 194 210 226 242
3 19 35 51 67 83 99 115 131 147 163 179 195 211 227 243
4 20 36 52 68 84 100 116 132 148 164 180 196 212 228 244
5 21 37 53 69 85 101 117 133 149 165 181 197 213 229 245
6 22 38 54 70 86 102 118 134 150 166 182 198 214 230 246
7 23 39 55 71 87 103 119 135 151 167 183 199 215 231 247
8 24 40 56 72 88 104 120 136 152 168 184 200 216 232 248
9 25 41 57 73 89 105 121 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 249
B (b) C (c) D (d) E (E) F (F)
Note : The characters shown in the parenthesis ( ) shown the display on the adjustment remote commander. (Example) If the DDS display or the adjustment remote commander shows BD (bd); Because the upper digit of the adjustment number is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the meeting point 189 of 1 and 2 in the above table is the corresponding decimal number.
Table. 6-3-1.
6-44
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
COVER
3-3. SERVICE MODE
1. Setting the Test Mode Page D Address 10 Data 00 01 02 05 Function Normal Forced MOVIE mode ( ) Forced PLAY mode ( ) Forced STILL mode ( )
Before setting the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01. For page D, the data set will be recorded in the non-volatile memory by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be exited even when the main power is turned off. After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data of this address to 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander. And select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00. 2. Bit value discrimination Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the adjustment remote commander for following items. Use the table below to discriminate if the bit value is 1 or 0.
Display on the adjustment remote commander
Address Page bit3 to bit0 discrimination bit7 to bit4 discrimination
Display on the adjustment remote commander 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A 9 A (A) B (b) C (c) D (d) E (E) B F (F )
bit3 or bit7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bit values bit2 bit1 or or bit6 bit5 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
bit0 or bit4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Example: If 8E is displayed on the adjustment remote commander, the bit values for bit7 to bit4 are shown in the A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown in the B column.
6-45
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
3. Switch check (1) Page 7
Address 0E
Bit 0 1 2 3 5 6
Function POWER switch, MODE dial (XVTR MODE SW) (PS-CX5500 block S007, S004) POWER switch, MODE dial (XVTR MODE SW) (PS-CX5500 block S007, S004) DISPLAY/BATTERRY INFO SW (XBATT VIEW SW) (CK-127 board S5206) OPEN switch (XEJECT SW) (PLUNGER EJECT block) PHOTO switch (PHOTO FREEZE SW) (PS-CX5500 block S001) POWER switch, MODE dial (XVTR MODE SW) (PS-CX5500 block S007, S004)
When bit value=1 POWER: ON MODE: PLAY/EDIT ( POWER: ON MODE: MOVIE ( ) ON ON ON POWER: ON MODE: STILL (
When bit value=0 OFF ) OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Using method: 1) Select page: 7, address: 0E. 2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated. 4. Switch check (2) Page 7
Address 0C
Bit 0 1 2 3 6
Function MIC jack (S-N.S. EXT MIC block) (FP-610 flexible) MIC jack (S-N.S. EXT MIC block) (FP-610 flexible) AUDIO/VIDEO jack (FP-611 flexible) S VIDEO jack (MA-420 board J5501) AUDIO/VIDEO jack (FP-611 flexible)
When bit value=1 Monaural Used Used Used Used
When bit value=0 Stereo Not used Not used Not used Not used
Using method: 1) Select page: 7, address: 0C. 2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated. 5. Switch check (3) Page 7
Address 52
Note1: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00. Note2: A personal computer must be connected to the USB jack.
Bit 7
Function USB jack (USB LANC block)
When bit value=1 When bit value=0 Used (Note2) Not used
Using method: 1) Select page: 7, address: 52. 2) By discriminating the bit value of display data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
6-46
DCR-DVD/100DVD100E
6. Switch check (4) Page 2
Address 60 to 65, 67
Using method: 1) Select page: 2, address: 60 to 65, 67. 2) By discriminating the display data, the pressed key can be discriminated. Data 19 (0D to 24)
00 (00 to 0C) PHOTO 60 (PHOTO REC) (KEY AD0) (PS-CX5500 block) (IC3103 tl ) (S002)
Address
32 (25 to 3F)
4E (40 to 5D)
6F (5F to 81)
96 (82 to AA)
EB (D6 to FF) No key input
COLOR SLOW S/ 61 BACK LIGHT FADER REVIEW SUPER NS (KEY AD1) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) (FP-610 flexible) No key input (IC3103 y; ) (S5301) (S5303) (S5305) (S9101) 62 STOP PREV PLAY NEXT PAUSE (KEY AD2) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) (FB-220 board) No key input (IC3103 ya ) (S5302) (S5304) (S5306) (S5308) (S5310) 63 FOCUS EXPOSURE VISUAL INDEX SET UP REC PANEL CLOSE PANEL OPEN (KEY AD3) (KP-CX5500 block) (KP-CX5500 block) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (IC3103 yg ) (S003) (S002) (S5209) (S5210) (S5211) (S5207) (S5207) PANEL PANEL 64 UP LEFT ENTER RIGHT DOWN REVERSE NORMAL (KEY AD4) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (FP-612 flexible) (FP-612 flexible) (IC3103 yh ) (S5212) (S5213) (S5214) (S5215) (S5216) (S9201) (S9201) 65 EDIT VOLUME + VOLUME No key input (KEY AD5) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (CK-127 board) (IC3103 yj ) (S5201) (S5204) (S5205) 67 START/STOP (KEY AD7) (PS-CX5500 block) No key input (IC3103 yl ) (S003)
7. Record of Use check Page 7 Address A4 to AC

Note1: This data will be kept even if the lithium battery (CK-127 board BT5201 of the cabinet (R) assembly) is removed. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Address A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC
Function User initial power on date (BCD code) Final condensation occurrence data (BCD code) Fault of writing to or erasing the flash memory (VC-307 board IC3401 )(BCD code)
Remarks Year Month Day Year Month Day Year Month Day After setting the clock, set the date of power on next
Using method: 1) The record of use data is displayed at addresses: A4 to AC.
6-47
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
8. Record of Self-diagnosis check Page 7 Address B0 to C6
Note1: This data will be kept even if the lithium battery (CK-127 board BT5201 of the cabinet (R) assembly) is removed. Note2: The data of page: 0, address: 10 must be 00.
Address B0 B1 B2 B4 B5 B6 B8 B9 BA BC BD BE C0 C1 C2 C4 C5 C6
Self-diagnosis code Repaired by code (Occurred 1st time) *1 Block function code (Occurred 1st time) Detailed code (Occurred 1st time) Repaired by code (Occurred 2nd time) *1 Block function code (Occurred 2nd time) Detailed code (Occurred 2nd time) Repaired by code (Occurred 3rd time) *1 Block function code (Occurred 3rd time) Detailed code (Occurred 3rd time) Repaired by code (Occurred 4th time) *1 Block function code (Occurred 4th time) Detailed code (Occurred 4th time) Repaired by code (Occurred 5th time) *1 Block function code (Occurred 5th time) Detailed code (Occurred 5th time) Repaired by code (Occurred the last time) *1 Block function code (Occurred the last time) Detailed code (Occurred the last time) *1: 01 t C, 03 t E
Using method: 1) The past self-diagnosis codes are displayed at addresses: BC to C6. Refer to SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION for detail of the self-diagnosis code except for the code being written in the following table. Self-diagnosis Code Repaired by: E E Block Function 20 94 Detailed Code 00 00 Symptom/State Correction
Data on A page or D page are Make data on A page and D rewritten. page correct value. Fault of writing to or erasing the Inspect the flash memory flash memory (VC-307 board IC3401)
Note: When the fault of writing to or erasing the flash memory (E:94:00) is displayed. After repair, clear the error information in the following method. 1) Select page:0, address:01, and set data:01. 2) Select page:7, address:00, and set data:EE. 3) Select page:7, address:01, set data:EE and press the PAUSE button. 4) Check that the data of page:7, address:02, changes from 00 to 01. 5) Select page:0, address:01, and set data:00.
6-48
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
OPTICAL
AXIS FRAME
Take a copy of OPTICAL AXIS FRAME with a clear sheet for use.
6-49
DCR-DVD100/DVD100E
FOR
CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT
For NTSC model
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION FRAME with a clear sheet for use.
For PAL model
6-50E
COVER
[Description of main button functions on toolbar of the Adobe Acrobat Reader Ver5.0 (for Windows)]
Toolbar
Printing a text
1. Click the Print button . 2. Specify a printer, print range, number of copies, and other options, and then click [OK].
Moving with link

1. Select either palm tool , zoom tool , text selection tool
Application of printing:
To set a range to be printed within a page, select the graphic and drag on the page to enclose a range to selection tool be printed, and then click the Print button.
, or graphic selection tool . 2. Place the pointer in the position in a text where the link exists (such as a button on cover and the table of contents page, or blue characters on the removal flowchart page or drawing page), and the pointer will change to the forefinger form . 3. Then, click the link. (You will go to the link destination.)
Moving with bookmark: Finding a text

1. Click the Find button . 2. Enter a character string to be found into a text box, and click the [Find]. (Specify the find options as necessary) 3. Open the find dialog box again, and click the [Find Again] and you can find the matched character strings displayed next. (Character strings entered previously are displayed as they are in the text box.) Click an item (text) on the bookmark pallet, and you can move to the link destination. Also, clicking can display the hidden items. (To go back to original state, click )

The parts on the drawing pages (block diagrams, circuit diagrams, printed circuit boards) and parts list pages in a text can be found using this find function. For example, find a Ref. No. of IC on the block diagram, and click the [Find Again] continuously, so that you can move to the Ref. No. of IC on the circuit diagram or printed circuit board diagram successively. Note: The find function may not be applied to the Service Manual depending on the date of issue.
Zooming or rotating the screen display

Zoom in Select the zoom tool Select the zoom tool Zoom out Select the zoom-out tool and click the page. and drag a range to be zoomed in.
and click the page. and drag a range to be zoomed
Switching a page
To move to the first page, click the To move to the last page, click the To move to the next page, click the . . . .
Select the zoom-out tool out.
To move to the previous page, click the
Zoom in/out Click the triangle button in the zoom control box to select the display magnification. Or, you may click ing in or out. or for zoom-
Reversing the screens displayed once

To reverse the previous screens (operation) one by one, click . the To advance the reversed screens (operation) one by one, click the . Rotate Click rotate tool
, and the page then rotates 90 degrees each.

This function allows you to go and back between circuit diagram and printed circuit board diagram, and accordingly it will be convenient for the voltage check.

The printed circuit board diagram you see now can be changed to the same direction as the set.
Reverse
987627351.pdf
Revision History
Ver. 1.0 Date 2003.08 History Official Release Contents S.M. Rev. issued
DSC-P100/P120
Ver 1.0 2004. 04
Revision History
Auto-ADJ
Link
Before starting adjustments
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards
SERVICE MODE
SERVICE MODE
CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENTS

PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS ADJUSTMENT PROGRAMS VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ERROR INITIALIZATION OF DATA
Use this Service Manual together with the Automatic Adjustment Program (DSC-P100_P120 Auto-Adj Ver1.[]r[][].exe) and the Color Shading Adjustment Program (W1P100ColorShade.exe).
Note: [] (numeric value) of the file name varies depending on the version of Automatic Adjustment Program.
Contents of LEVEL 2 and LEVEL 3 Service Manual

CONTENTS 1. SERVICE NOTE 2. DISASSEMBLY 3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS 4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 a a OVERALL POWER CD-511 FLEXIBLE, CH-146, SY-104 BOARD ST-105 FLEXIBLE, ST-102, MS-207 FLEXIBLE, JK-266 FLEXIBLE EXPLODED VIEWS ELECTRICAL PARTS a (CH-146, SY-104 BOARD)
9-876-734-51
Sony EMCS Co.
2004D0500-1 2004.4 Published by DI CS Strategy Div
DSC-P100/P120
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page Section Title Page
6.
ADJUSTMENTS
1-6-2. Precautions When an Error Occurred 6-24 1-7. Initialization of Data 6-25 1. Initializing All Page Data 6-25 2. Initializing Single Page Data 6-25 6-2. Service Mode 6-26 1. Setting the Test Mode 6-26 2. Bit Value Discrimination 6-26 3. LED Check 6-27 4. Switch Check (1) 6-27 5. Switch Check (2) 6-28 6. Mode Dial Check 6-28 7. Self Diagnosis Code 6-28 * The color reproduction frame is shown on page 6-29.
Before Starting Adjustment 6-1 1-1. Adjusting Items When Replacing Main Parts and Boards 6-2 6-1. Camera Section Adjustments 6-3 1-1. Preparations Before Adjustments 6-3 1-1-1. List of Service Tools 6-3 1-1-2. Preparations 6-4 1-1-3. Precautions 6-5 1. Setting the Switch 6-5 2. Subjects 6-5 3. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box 6-6 1-1-4. Using Method of SEUS 6-7 1. Connection 6-7 2. Operation 6-7 1-1-5. Precaution on Use of SEUS 6-7 1-2. Adjustment Programs 6-8 1-2-1. Automatic Adjustment Program 6-8 1. Precautions When Using Automatic Adjustment Program 6-8 2. Start of Automatic Adjustment Program 6-8 3. Function of Each Button on Main Menu Screen 6-8 1-2-2. Color Shading Adjustment Program 6-9 1. Application Environment 6-9 2. Installation Method 6-9 3. Notes When Using the Color Shading Adjustment Program 6-9 4. Starting Method of Color Shading Adjustment Program 6-9 5. Screen and Function of Each Button of Color Shading Adjustment Program 6-9 1-3. Video System Adjustments 6-10 1-3-1. Function of Each Button on Video System Adjustment Screen 6-10 1-3-2. Adjustment Items of Video System Adjustment 6-10 1-3-3. Adjusting Method 6-11 1-4. Camera System Adjustments 6-12 1-4-1. Function of Each Button on Camera System Adjustment Screen 6-12 1-4-2. Adjustment Items of Camera System Adjustment 6-13 1-4-3. Adjusting Method 6-14 1. Camera Adjustment 1 6-14 2. Camera Adjustment 2 6-15 3. Picture Frame Setting (Standard Picture Frame) 6-16 4. Color Shading Adjustment 6-17 5. Camera Adjustment 3 6-18 6. Camera Adjustment 4 6-20 1-5. LCD System Adjustments 6-21 1-5-1. Function of Each Button on LCD System Adjustment Screen 6-21 1-5-2. Adjustment Items of LCD System Adjustment 6-21 1-5-3. Adjusting Method 6-22 1-6. Error 6-23 1-6-1.Error Message 6-23 1. Connect Error 6-23 2. Reset the Camera and Try Again 6-23 3. Adjustment Time Out 6-23 4. Adjustment NG 6-23 5. Data Save Error 6-24
DSC-P100/P120 SECTION 6 ADJUSTMENTS

Before starting adjustment EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board
The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct. Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.
Procedure 1
Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board is replaced.
(Machine before starting repair) PC PC (Machine after a board is replaced)
Save the EVR data to a personal computer.
Download the saved data to a machine.
Procedure 2
Remove the flash memory from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed flash memory to the replaced board.
Remove the flash memory and install it.
(Former board)
(New board)
Procedure 3
When the data cannot be saved due to defective flash memory, or when the flash memory cannot be removed or installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.
(Machine to be repaired) PC (Machine to be repaired)
Download the data. Save the data.
(The same model of the same destination)
After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the respective items of the EVR data. (Refer to page 6-2 for the items to be checked.)
6-1
DSC-P100/P120
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table. Note 1: The automatic Adjustment Program does not support the Initialization of data. Perform it manually. Note 2: Use the Color Shading Adjustment Program (W1P100ColorShade.exe) when performing Color Shading Adjustment of Camera System Adjustment.
Replaced parts Block replacement Mounted parts replacement (Timing gen., CCD signal process) Flash memory Board replacement replacement
LCD901 LCD unit
CD-511 board (COMPLETE)
CH-146 board (COMPLETE)
Adjusting item
Adjustment
SY-104 board (COMPLETE)
CD-511 board IC101
CH-146 board IC101
SY-104 board IC301
SY-104 board IC302
SY-104 board IC801
(Note 1) VIDEO adjustment CAMERA adjustment 1 CAMERA adjustment 2 (Note 2)
Initialization of data Video output level adj. Flange back adj. Flange back check Color shading adj. F No. compensation Mechanical shutter adj. Light value adj. AWB 3200K standard data input AWB 5800K standard data input
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
z z z z z
z z z
CAMERA adjustment 3
AWB 5800K check AWB 3200K check CCD linearity check Color reproduction adj. CCD white defect compensation check CCD black defect compensation check Strobe adj. Auto focus illumination check VCO adj. Contrast adj. V-COM adj. White Balance adj.
z z z
CAMERA adjustment 4
z z
z z z
z z z
LCD adjustment
z z
Table 6-1-1
6-2
SY-104 board IC502
D901
CD-511 board D104
LCD block
LCD block
Lens block
Flash unit
(Camera system control) (With built-in flash memory)
(AF illumination LED)
Back light unit
(Camera DSP)
(CCD imager)
(Video amp.)
(LCD driver)
DSC-P100/P120
6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENTS

1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENTS
AC power adapter 1-1-1. List of Service Tools Oscilloscope Color monitor Vectorscope Calculating machine capable of calculating hexadecimal numbers. J-1 J-2 HASP key and application for adjustment (SEUS) Personal computer (Note) USB cable 1-827-038-11 Contact our service headquater of each area how to get the application for adjustment (SEUS) and HASP key. J-5 Pattern box PTB-450 J-6082-200-A or Small pattern box PTB-1450 J-6082-557-A J-7 J-8 Color bar chart For PTB-450: J-6020-250-A For PTB-1450: J-6082-559-A J-9 Filter for color temperature correction (C14) J-6080-058-A J-6 Clear chart For PTB-450: J-6080-621-A For PTB-1450: J-6082-560-A J-3
J-4
Minipattern box J-6082-353-B
Siemens star chart J-6080-875-A
J-10
J-11
J-12
Background paper J-2501-130-A
Multiple connector 1-818-383-11
USB multi cable 1-829-109-11
Note: Personal computer OS: Windows98/98SE/Me/2000/XP Home/XP Pro RAM: 256MB or more recommended USB: 2.0 recommended (also compatible with 1.1) Two connectors are required.
Fig. 6-1-1
6-3
DSC-P100/P120
1-1-2. Preparations 1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 6-1-3. 2) Start up the application for adjustment (SEUS).
Pattern box
Front of the lens
L = About 28 cm (PTB-450) L = About 12 cm (PTB-1450)
Fig. 6-1-2
Note: Connect the PC and camera with the USB multi cable (1-829-109-11) without using the multiple connector (1-818-383-11) when performing CAMERA Adjustment 1.
Insert the Memory Stick.
PC
OS: Windows 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP RAM: 256MB or more recommended USB: 2.0 recommended (also compatible with 1.1) Two connectors are required.
HASP Key
USB cable (1-827-038-11) To USB connector To A/V OUT jack AC power adaptor
To USB connector AC IN
To DC IN jack
Multiple connector (1-818-383-11)
Vectorscope Color monitor Terminated 75 Video (yellow)
Audio (Black)
Fig. 6-1-3
6-4
DSC-P100/P120
1-1-3. Precautions 1. Setting the Switch Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments. 1. Mode Dial .......................................... P (Program auto) 2. ZOOM switch (Control switch block (SW) S002, S003) .................... WIDE end 3. Video Out (SET UP setting) .............. NTSC 4. Digital Zoom (SET UP setting) ......... Off 5. EV (Menu items) ............................... 0EV 6. Focus (Menu items) ........................... Multi AF 7. WB (Menu items) .............................. Auto 8. ISO (Menu items) .............................. Auto 9. Flash Level (Menu items) .................. Normal 10. P.Effect (Menu items) ........................ Off 11. Saturation (Menu items) .................... Normal 12. Contrast (Menu items) ....................... Normal 13. Sharpness (Menu items) .................... Normal Color bar chart (Standard picture frame)
Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red
H
Electronic beam scanning frame
C=D
Blue
Yellow Cyan Green White Magenta Red Blue
CRT picture frame
B A A=B/2
B A Enlargement
V Fig. b (monitor TV picture)
Fig. a (VIDEO terminal of A/V jack output waveform) Difference in level
Adjust the camera zoom and direction to obtain the output waveform shown in Fig a and the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b.
Fig. 6-1-4
2. Subjects 1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame). When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-4. (Standard picture frame) 2) Clear chart (Standard picture frame) Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during this time)
6-5
DSC-P100/P120
3. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box A dark room is required to provide an accurate flash adjustment. If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given below; 1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness.
woody board A (2) 400 mm woody board B (2) 370 mm woody board C (1) 700 mm
513 mm
513 mm
700 mm
730 mm
700 mm
Fig. 6-1-5
2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B. 3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C. 4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper side of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig. 6-1-6)
woody board A
woody board B
woody board A
woody board B woody board C
Fig. 6-1-6
6-6
DSC-P100/P120
1-1-4.
Using Method of SEUS
The application for adjustment (SEUS) is used to change the coefficient for calculating the signal processing or EVR data. The SEUS performs two-way communication between PC and set through the USB terminal. The two-way communication result data can be written to the nonvolatile memory. 1. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Connection Connect the HASP key to the USB terminal of the PC. Connect the PC and set with the USB cable. Confirm that the set starts in the USB mode. Start the SEUS on the PC. Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen. If the connection is normal, the SEUS screen will be as shown in Fig. 6-1-7, indicating the connected state. Note: The SEUS will go in disconnect" state, if the set is turned off (for instance, by resetting the set). In such a case, click [Connect] on the SEUS screen to restore the connected state.
2. Operation Page change To change the page, click [Page] on the SEUS screen and enter the page to be changed. The page is displayed in hexadecimal notation. Address change To change the address, click [Address] on the SEUS screen and enter the address to be changed. The address is displayed in hexadecimal notation. Data change To change the data, click [Set] on the SEUS screen and enter the data. The data is displayed in hexadecimal notation. This operation does not write the data to the nonvolatile memory. Data saving To write the all changed data to the nonvolatile memory, click [Save] on the SEUS screen and wait for 3 sec. Data reading The data displayed on the SEUS screen are the data values at the time when the pages and addresses were set, and they are not updated automatically. To check the data change, click [Read] on the SEUS screen and update the displayed data. 1-1-5. Precaution on Use of SEUS Wrong SEUS operation could clear correct adjustment data. To prevent the data clear by mistake, it is recommended to save all adjustment data by clicking [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen before starting the adjustment. Saving Method: 1) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen. 2) Click [Page], and enter the page number to be saved. 3) Click [Page] to read the data to be saved from the camera. 4) Click [File] and save the data to PC. Loading Method: 1) Select page: 00, address: 01 and set data: 01. 2) Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen. 3) Click [File] and load the data from PC. 4) Click [Write] on the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen. 5) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen. 6) Click [Save] on the SEUS screen. 7) Wait for 3 sec. 8) Select page: 00, address: 01 and set data: 00.
Fig. 6-1-7
6-7
DSC-P100/P120
1-2.
ADJUSTMENT PROGRAMS
The DSC-P100/P120 is adjusted with the Automatic Adjustment Program and the Color Shading Adjustment Program. The Automatic Adjustment Program automatically controls the adjustment operations that were formerly entered manually on the operation screen of the SEUS (some adjustments may be manually operated on the SEUS operation screen). The Color Shading Adjustment Program automatically performs Color Shading Adjustment of Camera System Adjustment. 1-2-1. Automatic Adjustment Program 1. Precautions When Using Automatic Adjustment Program 1) The Automatic Adjustment Program writes the adjustment results such as EVR data to the set through two-way communication with the camera via the SEUS. Accordingly, the Automatic Adjustment Program must be used in the environment where the SEUS operates. 2) The program run time may vary depending on the environment of the personal computer used. 3) Even if the Automatic Adjustment Program is used without starting the SEUS, the SEUS will start automatically when the adjustment is executed. However, it may take time for the SEUS to start, and therefore the Automatic Adjustment Program should be used with the SEUS started in order to reduce the program run time. 2. Start of Automatic Adjustment Program Double-click the application file (DSC-P100_P120 Auto-Adj Ver_1.[]r[][].exe), and the Automatic Adjustment Program will start. Note: [] (numeric value) of the file name varies depending on the version of Automatic Adjustment Program.
3. Function of Each Button on Main Menu Screen When the Automatic Adjustment Program started, the Main Menu screen in Fig. 6-1-8 will appear. On this screen, select each adjustment section.
3 4
Fig. 6-1-8
1 [VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button The VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen appears. 2 [CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button The CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen appears. 3 [LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button The LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen appears. 4 [END] button The Automatic Adjustment Program finishes.
6-8
DSC-P100/P120
1-2-2. Color Shading Adjustment Program 1. Application Environment OS: Windows 98/98SE/Me/2000/XP RAM: 256MB or more recommended USB: 2.0 recommended (also compatible with 1.1) Two connectors are required. 2. Installation Method Extract the file compressed in the ZIP format (W1P100 color Shade.zip). Execute the extracted file (setup.exe), and the installer will start. Install the program following the instructions given on the installer screen. 3. Notes When Using the Color Shading Adjustment Program 1) The SEUS must be installed in the PC. 2) The HASP Key for SEUS must be connected to the USB connector. The program will not start unless the HASP Key is connected. 4. Starting Method of Color Shading Adjustment Program Click the [Start] button on the task bar, and click the [DSC-W1, P100 Color Shade Adjustment] from the [Programs], and the program will start.
5.
Screen and Function of Each Button of Color Shading Adjustment Program
1 2 3 4
Fig. 6-1-9
1 Model Select radio button Selects the model to be adjusted. 2 [Connect] button Makes connection to the camera and switches the camera to the adjustment mode. In the case of successful connection to the camera, the indication at the part A changes to Connected and the [Color Shading Adjustment] button and the [Disconnect] button become active. 3 [Color Shading Adjustment] button Starts the Color Shading Adjustment. 4 [Disconnect] button Cancels the connection to the camera.
6-9
DSC-P100/P120
1-3.
1-3-1.
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
1-3-2.
Function of Each Button on Video System Adjustment Screen Click the [VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button on the Main Menu screen, and the VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen in Fig. 6-1-10 will appear.
1
Adjustment Items of VIDEO System Adjustment The adjustment items of video system adjustment are as listed in Table 6-1-2. The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the adjustment items if the VIDEO Adjustment Start button is clicked. Button Name Adjustment Signal Page Arbitrary 8F Address D0
VIDEO VIDEO Output Adjustment Level Adj.
Table 6-1-2
2
Fig. 6-1-10
1 [To Menu] button The Main Menu screen comes back. 2 [VIDEO Adjustment Start] button Video Adjustment starts. 3 [Reset] button This button functions same as the Reset button of the camera. 4 [Release Data Setting] button The data setting at the adjustment is cancelled. During the data setting, the button color changes from white to red. When the data setting is cancelled, the button color returns to white. (Use this button when an error occurred in the video adjustment. If the adjustment completed successfully, the data setting is automatically cancelled and the button color returns to white.)
6-10
DSC-P100/P120
1-3-3. Adjusting Method [Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and sequence] 1. Data Setting during Video Adj. 2. Video Output Level Adj. 3. Release of Data Setting during Video Adj. [Specified value of video output level adj.] Measurement Point Video terminal of AV OUT jack of the multiple connector (75 terminated) Oscilloscope Sync level: A = 286 5 mV (NTSC mode) A = 300 5 mV (PAL mode) Burst level: B = 286 30 mV (NTSC mode) B = 300 30 mV (PAL mode)
SEUS operation screen

UP/DOWN key
Measuring Instrument Specified Value
Fig. 6-1-13
[Adjusting method] 1) Click the [VIDEO Adjustment Start] button. 2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the 1. Data Setting during Video Adj.. 3) If 1. Data Setting during Video Adj. completed successfully, the next message is displayed during the execution of 2. Video Output Level Adj.. Using the UP/DOWN key on the SEUS Operation screen, adjust so that the sync level of the video signals satisfies the specified value. After the adjustment, check that the burst level of the video signals satisfies the specified value, and click the [OK] button in the message.
Check on the oscilloscope
Fig. 6-1-14
Fig. 6-1-11
4) If the [OK] button button is clicked, 3. Release of Data Setting during Video Adj. will be executed. 5) Upon successful completion of all items of the VIDEO adjustment, the following message is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-12
6-11
DSC-P100/P120
1-4.
1-4-1.
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Function of Each Button on Camera System Adjustment Screen Click the [CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button on the Main Menu screen, and the CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen in Fig. 6-1-15 will appear.
1 2
Fig. 6-1-15
1 [To Menu] button The Main Menu screen comes back. 2 Adjustment start buttons [CAMERA Adjustment 1 Start] button Camera Adjustment 1 starts. [CAMERA Adjustment 2 Start] button Camera Adjustment 2 starts. [CAMERA Adjustment 3 Start] button Camera Adjustment 3 starts. [CAMERA Adjustment 4 Start] button Camera Adjustment 4 starts. 3 [Reset] button This button functions same as the Reset button of the camera. 4 [Release Data Setting] button The data setting at the adjustment is cancelled. During the data setting, the button color changes from white to red. When the data setting is cancelled, the button color returns to white. (Use this button when an error occurred in the camera adjustment 1-4. If the adjustment completed successfully, the data setting is automatically cancelled and the button color returns to white.)
6-12
DSC-P100/P120
1-4-2.
Adjustment Items of Camera System Adjustment The adjustment items of camera system adjustment are as listed in Table 6-1-3. The Automatic Adjustment Program divides the adjustment items into four, camera adjustment 1-4. Clicking either CAMERA Adjustment Start button allows the adjustment item which corresponds to that button to be executed. The adjustment conditions of the subject and filter vary depending on which item is adjusted. The Adjustment Program displays an instruction for the subject and filter as a message during the adjustment. Button Name CAMERA Adjustment 1 Adjustment Flange Back Adj. Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter for minipattern box (Note 1) Siemens star chart with ND filter (1.0m from front the lens) (Luminance: 200 to 400 lux) Clear chart (Standard picture frame) 6F Clear chart (Standard picture frame) 6F 6F 6E Clear chart (Standard picture frame) Filter C14 for color temperature correction Clear chart (Standard picture frame) Color ber chart (Standard picture frame) Clear chart (Standard picture frame) 6E 60 to 67 6E 60 to 64, 6B to 6D 6B to 6D, B8 to D7 65 to 67 04 to 21, 42, 43 00 to 03, 24 to 41, 44, 45 Adjustment Page 6D 6F Adjustment Address B0 to B7, C0 to C7 18 to 53
CAMERA Adjustment 2 (Note 2)
Flange Back Check Color Shading Adj. F No. Compensation Mechanical Shutter Adj. Light Value Adj. AWB 3200K Standard Data Input AWB 5800K Standard Data Input
CAMERA Adjustment 3
AWB 5800K Check AWB 3200K Check CCD Linearity Check Color Reproduction Adj. CCD White Defect Compensation Check CCD Black Defect Compensation Check
CAMERA Adjustment 4
Strobe Adj. Auto Focus Illumination Check
6E Flash adjustment box 6F 6F
72 to 75 D8 to EF 10 to 15
Note 1: Dark Siemens star chart. Note 2: Use the Color Shading Adjustment Program (W1P100ColorShade.exe) when performing Color Shading Adjustment of Camera System Adjustment.
Table 6-1-3
6-13
DSC-P100/P120
1-4-3. Adjusting Method 1. CAMERA Adjustment 1 Note: Connect the PC and camera with the USB multi cable (1829-109-11) without using the multiple connector (1-818383-11) when performing CAMERA Adjustment 1. [Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and sequence] 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj. 2. Flange Back Adj. 3. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. [Adjusting method] 1) Click the [CAMERA Adjustment 1 Start] button. 2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj.. 3) Upon successful completion of the 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj., the following message is displayed. Set the subject by referring to Preparation of Flange Back Adj..
Preparation of Flange Back Adj. 1) The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following figure. Note 1: The attachment lenses are not used. Note 2: Take care not to hit the mini-pattern box when extending the lens. 2) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and the front of lens of camera is less than 3 cm. 3) Make the height of minipattern box and the camera equal. 4) Check the output voltage of the regulated power supply is the specified voltage 0.01 Vdc. 5) Check that the center of Siemens star chart meets the center of shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE end and WIDE end respectively. Specified voltage: The specified voltage varies according to the minipattern box, so adjustment the power supply output voltage to the specified voltage written on the sheet which is supplied with the minipattern box.
Below 3 cm Minipattern box Camera
Fig. 6-1-16
4) If the [OK] button is clicked, 2. Flange Back Adj. and 3. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. will be executed. 5) Upon successful completion of all items of the CAMERA Adjustment 1, the following message is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
Regulated power supply Output voltage : Specified voltage 0.01 Vdc Output current : more than 3.5 A
Red (+) Black () Yellow (SENS +) White (SENS ) Black (GND) Need not connected
Fig. 6-1-18 Fig. 6-1-17
6-14
DSC-P100/P120
2. CAMERA Adjustment 2 [Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and sequence] 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj. 2. Flange Back Check 3. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. [Adjusting method] 1) Click the [CAMERA Adjustment 2 Start] button. 2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj.. 3) Upon successful completion of the 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj., the following message is displayed. Set the subject in accordance with the message.
6) Upon successful completion of all items of the CAMERA Adjustment 2, the following message is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-21
Fig. 6-1-19
4) Click the [OK] button is clicked, 2. Flange Back Check is executed. The following messages are displayed, and then operate the cameral to make a check in accordance with the messages.
Fig. 6-1-20
5) Upon completion of 2. Flange Back Check, 3. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. is executed.
6-15
DSC-P100/P120
3. Picture Frame Setting (Standard Picture Frame) In the Color Shading Adjustment and CAMERA Adjustment 3, set the picture frame so as to attain the positions shown in the following figure when shooting the color bar chart. Check on the oscilloscope Measurement Point: Video terminal of A/V OUT jack of the multiple connector (75 terminated) 1. Horizontal period
A=C= A B B 2
Fig. 6-1-22
2. Vertical period
E E=F F
Fig. 6-1-23
Check on the monitor TV
A=C= A B B 2 C E
E=F
F Color bar chart picture frame Effective picture frame
Fig. 6-1-24
6-16
DSC-P100/P120
4. Color Shading Adjustment [Adjustment method] 1) Start the Color Shading Adjustment Program (W1P100ColorShade.exe). 2) Select DSC-P100 with the Model Select radio button.
7)
Click the [Color Shading Adjustment] button.
Fig. 6-1-27
8) A picture captured by the camera is displayed on the screen, and the adjustment and checking are performed.
Fig. 6-1-25
3) Click the [Connect] button to set the camera to the adjustment mode.
Fig. 6-1-28
9) Upon successful completion of the adjustment, the following message is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-26
4) Adjust the mode dial of the camera to P and with the zoom at WIDE end, shoot the color bar chart. 5) Adjust the camera direction and distance to set the picture frame. (Refer to 3. Picture Frame Setting) 6) Remove the color bar chart in the pattern box, and set the clear chart. Note: At this time, nothing must be reflected in the clear chart.
Fig. 6-1-29
6-17
DSC-P100/P120
5. CAMERA Adjustment 3 [Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and sequence] 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj. 2. Picture Frame Setting 3. F No. Compensation 4. Mechanical Shutter Adj. 5. Light Value Adj. 6. AWB 3200K Standard Data Input 7. AWB 5800K Standard Data Input 8. AWB 5800K Check 9. AWB 3200K Check 10. CCD Linearity Check 11. Color Reproduction Adj. 12. CCD White Defect Compensation Check 13. CCD Black Defect Compensation Check 14. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. [Adjusting method] 1) Click the [CAMERA Adjustment 3 Start] button. 2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj.. 3) Upon successful completion of 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj., 2. Picture Frame Setting is executed. The following message is displayed, and then referring to Fig. 6-1-22 to Fig. 6-1-24 (See page 6-16), set the subject and click the [OK] button.
5) Upon successful completion of the AWB 3200K Check, the following message is displayed. Set the filter in accordance with the message.
Fig. 6-1-32
6) Click the [OK] button, and the 7. AWB 5800K Standard Data Input and 8. AWB 5800K Check will be executed. 7) Upon successful completion of the AWB 5800K Check, the following message is displayed. Set the filter in accordance with the message.
Fig. 6-1-33
8) Click the [OK] button, and the 9. AWB 3200K Check and 10. CCD Linearity Check will be executed. 9) Upon successful completion of 10. CCD Linearity Check, the following message is displayed. Change the chart in accordance with the message.
Fig. 6-1-30
After that, the next message is displayed. Then, change the chart in accordance with the message.
Fig. 6-1-34
Fig. 6-1-31
4) Click the [OK] button, and the items from 3. F No. Compensation to 6. AWB 3200K Standard Data Input will be executed.
6-18
DSC-P100/P120
10) Click the [OK] button, and 11. Color Reproduction Adj. will be executed. The following messages are displayed in order, and then operate the vectorscope to make a check with the color reproduction frame in accordance with the message.
Check on the vectorscope
R-Y
MG R
YE W B-Y B
G CY
Fig. 6-1-35
11) Upon successful completion of 11. Color Reproduction Adj., the following message is displayed. Change the chart in accordance with the message.
Burst Position
Fig. 6-1-38
Fig. 6-1-36
12) Click the [OK] button, and the 12. CCD White Defect Compensation Check, 13. CCD Black Defect Compensation Check and 14. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. will be executed. 13) Upon successful completion of all items of the CAMERA Adjustment 3, the following message is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-37
6-19
DSC-P100/P120
6. CAMERA Adjustment 4 Note: CAMERA Adjustment 4 is available only once after the power is turned on. If the adjustment is retried, turn off the power and turn on again. [Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and sequence] 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj. 2. Strobe Adj. 3. Auto Focus Illumination Check 4. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. [Adjusting method] 1) Click the [CAMERA Adjustment 4 Start] button. 2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj.. 3) Upon successful completion of the 1. Data Setting during Camera Adj., the following message is displayed. Set the subject in accordance with the message. (For the Flash adjustment box, refer to 3. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box (see page 6-6).)
6) Upon successful completion of 2. Strobe Adj., 3. Auto Focus Illumination Check is executed. 7) Upon successful completion of the 3. Auto Focus Illumination Check, the 4. Release of Data Setting during Camera Adj. will be executed successively. 8) Upon successful completion of all items of the CAMERA Adjustment 4, the following message is displayed. Click the [OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-41
Fig. 6-1-39
4) Press the [OK] button, and the 2. Strobe Adj. will be executed. 5) During execution of 2. Strobe Adj., the following message is displayed. After checking the flashing of strobe light, click the [OK] button. (This message is displayed 2 times during execution of adjustment.)
Fig. 6-1-40
6-20
DSC-P100/P120
1-5.
1-5-1.
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Function of Each Button on LCD System Adjustment Screen Click the [LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT] button on the Main Menu screen, and the LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT screen in Fig. 6-1-42 will appear.
1
1-5-2. Adjustment Items of LCD System Adjustment The adjustment items of LCD system adjustment are as listed in Table 6-1-4. The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the adjustment items if the LCD Adjustment Start button is clicked. Button Name LCD Adjustment VCO adj. Contrast adj. White Balance adj. Adjustment V-COM adj. Arbitrary Signal Page 8F 8F 8F 8F Address 23 2C 24 28, 2A
Table 6-1-4
Fig. 6-1-42
1 [To Menu] button The Main Menu screen comes back. 2 [LCD Adjustment Start] button LCD Adjustment starts. 3 [Reset] button This button functions same as the Reset button of the camera. 4 [Release Data Setting] button The data setting at the adjustment is cancelled. During the data setting, the button color changes from white to red. When the data setting is cancelled, the button color returns to white. (Use this button when an error occurred in the LCD adjustment. If the adjustment completed successfully, the data setting is automatically cancelled and the button color returns to white.)
6-21
DSC-P100/P120
1-5-3. Adjusting Method [Automatic Adjustment Program execution items and sequence] 1. Data Setting during LCD Adj. 2. VCO Adj. 3. Contrast Adj. 4. V-COM Adj. 5. White Balance Adj. 6. Release of Data Setting during LCD Adj. [Adjusting method] 1) Click the [LCD Adjustment Start] button. 2) The Automatic Adjustment Program executes the items from 1. Data Setting during LCD Adj. to 3. Contrast Adj.. 3) Upon successful completion of the 3. Contrast Adj., the following message is displayed during execution in 4. V-COM Adj.. On the SEUS screen, operate the UP/DOWN key so that the brightness of portions A and B on the LCD panel is equal. After the adjustment, click the [OK] button.
SEUS operation screen

UP/DOWN key
Fig. 6-1-46
Check on the LCD screen (V-COM Adj.)
Fig. 6-1-43
4) Upon completion of 4. V-COM Adj., 5. White Balance Adj. is executed. The following message is displayed, and then check that LCD screen is not colored. If colored, change the data of page: 8F, address: 28 and 2A on the SEUS Operation screen to adjust so that the LCD screen is not colored.
B A
Fig. 6-1-47
Fig. 6-1-44
5) If the [OK] button is clicked, 6. Release of Data Setting during LCD Adj. will be executed.
Fig. 6-1-45
6-22
DSC-P100/P120
1-6.
ERROR
3.
Adjustment Time Out
In case of an error during the execution of adjustment, the Automatic Adjustment Program interrupts the processing at that point, and displays an error message, and then terminates the program execution there. 1-6-1. Error Message When an error message is displayed, perform the remedy given below, and then retry adjustment. If the error message is displayed though the remedy was performed, the circuits will be faulty. 1. Connect Error Symptom Cause Remedy
This part indicates the adjustment item in which an error occurred.
Fig. 6-1-50
Adjustment does not finish within the specified time. Adjustment conditions are wrong. Data error exists in the camera. Check that the conditions such as a subject are correct. Reset the camera.
Fig. 6-1-48
4.
Adjustment NG
Symptom Cause
USB communication with the set is abnormal. USB cable is not inserted tightly. Power supply is not installed correctly. Communication with SEUS is abnormal. Disconnect the USB cable once, and then reconnect it tightly and check that the set is in USB Mode. Install the power supply correctly. Start the SEUS and click the [Connect] to check that the connection state is established.
This part indicates the adjustment item in which an error occurred.
Remedy
Fig. 6-1-51
Symptom Cause The adjusted data does not become the specified value. Adjustment conditions are wrong. Data error exists in the camera. Check that the conditions such as a subject are correct. Reset the camera.
2.
RESET the CAMERA and Try Again
Remedy
Fig. 6-1-49
Symptom Cause Remedy
The camera is not ready for adjustment. Data error exists in the camera. Reset the camera.
6-23
DSC-P100/P120
5.
Data Save Error
1-6-2. Precautions When an Error Occurred The Automatic Adjustment Program sets the data for adjustment before the adjustment starts. Accordingly, if the adjustment terminates by an error, the data during the adjustment may be left in the camera. Note 1: With this data left in the camera, the camera will not operate normally. In this case, the [Release Data Setting] button is displayed in red on the screen as shown in Fig. 6-1-53, 54 and 55. Click the [Release Data Setting] button to cancel the data setting. When the data setting is cancelled, the button color becomes white. Note 2: When Data Save Error occurred, the [Release Data Setting] button is displayed in white. To cancel the data setting, perform it on the SEUS Operation screen. How to cancel the data setting is displayed in the error message. Video System Adjustment screen
How to cancel the data setting during adjustment is display here.
Fig. 6-1-52
Symptom Cause data cannot be saved normally. (The data setting during adjustment cannot be cancelled) Data writing to the flash memory failed. Connection is faulty. Power supply is not installed correctly. On the SEUS Operation screen, [Set] the data to the pages and addresses displayed in the message, and [Save] them. (Cancel manually the data setting during adjustment.) Check the connection. Install the power supply correctly.
Remedy
Fig. 6-1-53
Camera System Adjustment screen
Fig. 6-1-54
LCD System Adjustment screen
Fig. 6-1-55
6-24
DSC-P100/P120
1-7.
INITIALIZATION OF DATA
1. Initializing All Page Data By performing the following procedure, data of all pages will be initialized. Note: If all page data have been initialized, all adjustments need to be performed again. Initializing Method: 1) Select page: 00, address: 01 and set data: 01. 2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS SECTOR WRITE screen. 3) Check that the SET ID is 0B. 4) Click [All] of the ALL SELECT buttons to select all pages. (Fig. 6-1-56 A) 5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the flash memory of the camera. 6) Wait for 3 sec. 7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS SECTOR WRITE screen. 8) Select page: 8E, address: 00 and set data: 20. 9) Click [Save] on the SEUS screen. 10) Wait for 3 sec. Processing after Completing Initializing Order Page Address 1 2 20 20 00 01 Data 29 [Set] 29 [Set] (Note) Procedure
2. Initializing Single Page Data By performing the following procedure, data of the page that you want to initialize will be initialized. Note 1: If the 6D or 6E or 6F page data have been initialized, the following adjustment needs to be performed again. 1) Camera system adjustments Note 2: If the 8F page data have been initialized, the following adjustment needs to be performed again. 1) Video system adjustments 2) LCD system adjustments Initializing Method: 1) Select page: 00, address: 01 and set data: 01. 2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS SECTOR WRITE screen. 3) Check that the SET ID is 0B. 4) Click All of the option buttons of target page. (Fig. 6-1-56 B) 5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the flash memory of the camera. 6) Wait for 3 sec. 7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS SECTOR WRITE screen. 8) When 8E page is initialized, select page: 8E, address: 00 and set data: 20. 9) Click [Save] on the SEUS screen. 10) Wait for 3 sec. Processing after Completing Initializing Order Page Address Data 29 [Set] 29 [Set] (Note) Procedure
Note: At this time, the camera is reset and the power is turns off once and then on again. Accordingly, the message Receive Packet Error is displayed on the SEUS screen, and the SEUS goes in disconnect state, but this is not a trouble. Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen to restore the connected state. (In case that the power does not turn on again, press the power button.)
B
1 2
20 20
00 01
Note: At this time, the camera is reset and the power is turns off once and then on again. Accordingly, the message Receive Packet Error is displayed on the SEUS screen, and the SEUS goes in disconnect state, but this is not a trouble. Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen to restore the connected state. (In case that the power does not turn on again, press the power button.)
0B
Fig. 6-1-56
6-25
DSC-P100/P120
6-2. SERVICE MODE

1. Setting the Test Mode Address 23
2. Bit Value Discrimination In the following items, the bit values must be discriminated from the data displayed on the SEUS. Whether bit values are 1 or 0 can be discriminated from the table shown below. Data displayed on SEUS
Page 2F Data 80 00 01 02 03 04 05 Normal
Function Forced CAMERA (Auto) mode Forced CAMERA (Program Auto) mode Forced PLAY mode Forced SET UP mode Forced MOVIE mode Forced CAMERA (Manual) mode Display on the SEUS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A 8 9 A B C D B E F bit3 or bit7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit values bit2 or bit6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 bit1 or bit5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 bit0 or bit4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
00
bit 3 to bit 0 discriminated bit 7 to bit 4 discriminated
Before setting the data, select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. For page: 2F, the data set is recorded in non-volatile memory by saving data. In this case, the Test mode is not released even if the camera is turned off, thus requiring extreme care. After completing adjustments/repairs, release the data setting. 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and set data: 80. 3) Save the data. 4) Wait for 3 sec. 5) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00.
Example: If the displayed data is 8E, bit 7 - bit 4 values can be discriminated from block (A), and also bit 3 - bit 0 values from block (B).
6-26
DSC-P100/P120
3.
LED Check Address 04 Address 12 Address FE
Page 20 Page 80 Page 8E
Using method: 1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01. 2) Select page: 20, address: 04, and set data: 02. 3) Select page: 8E, address: FE, and set data: 20. 4) Select page: 80, address: 12, and set data: 01. 5) Check that all LED are lit. SELF TIMER/AF ILLUMINATOR SELF TIMER/RECORRDING AE/AF LOCK FLASH CHARGE MS ACCESS 6) Select page: 80, address: 12, and set data: 00. 7) Select page: 20, address: 04, and set data: 00. 8) Select page: 8E, address: FE, and set data: 00. 9) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 00. 10) Click [Disconnect] on the SEUS screen. 11) Disconnect the USB cable. 12) Turn off the power.
4.
Switch Check (1) Address 13 Function When data = 00 When data = 01 When data = 02 OFF ON ON
Page 80
Shutter button (XAE LOCK SW) (CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL) S001) Shutter button (XSHTR ON SW) (CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (RL) S001)
OFF
OFF
ON
Using method: 1) Select page: 80, address: 13. 2) By discriminating the read data, the state of the switches can be discriminated.
6-27
DSC-P100/P120
5. Switch Check (2) Page 20 Addresses 90 to 92
Using method: 1) Select page: 20, addresses: 90 to 92. 2) By discriminating the read data, the pressed key can be discriminated. Address Data 00 to 0C MENU (Control switch block (SW)) (S005) DISPLAY/ LCD ON/OFF (Control switch block (SW)) (S011) ZOOM W (Control switch block (SW)) (S002) 0D to 28 CONTROL DOWN (Control switch block (SW)) (S010) 29 to 4A IMAGE SIZE/ DELETE (Control switch block (SW)) (S008) 4B to 77 CONTROL UP (Control switch block (SW)) (S006) 78 to E4 E5 to FF
90 (KEY AD0) (IC401 J6 )
No key input
91 (KEY AD1) (IC401 H6 ) 92 (KEY AD2) (IC401 G6 )
CONTROL LEFT CONTROL SET CONTROL RIGHT (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW)) (S004) (S007) (S009) ZOOM T (Control switch block (SW)) (S003)
No key input
No key input
6. Mode Dial Check Page 20 Addresses 95, 96
Using method: 1) Select page: 20, addresses: 95 and 96. 2) By discriminating the read data, the state of the mode dial can be discriminated. Address Data 00 to 0C 0D to 28 29 to 4A 4B to 77 78 to 9B 9C to E4 E5 to FF Others
95 AUTO P (Program Auto) PLAY SET UP MOVIE M (manual) (MODE DIAL0) (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (IC401 J8 ) block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW)) block (SW)) 96 SCN (MODE DIAL1) (Control switch (IC401 J9 ) block (SW))
Others
7. Self Diagnosis Code Display Code C:32:ss C:13:ss E:61:ss E:91:ss Countermeasure Turn the power off and on again. Format the Memory stick. Insert a new Memory Stick. Checking of lens drive circuit. Checking of flash unit or replacement of flash unit. Cause Trouble with hardware. Unformatted memory stick is inserted. Memory stick is broken. When failed in the focus and zoom initialization. Abnormality when flash is being charged. Caution Display During Error SYSTEM ERROR FORMAT ERROR MEMORY STICK ERROR
6-28
DSC-P100/P120
FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION FRAME with a clear sheet for use.
For NTSC mode
R-Y
MG R
YE W B-Y B
G CY
DSC-P100/P120
6-29E 6-29
Reverse
987673451.pdf
Revision History
Ver. 1.0 Date 2004.04 History Official Release Contents S.M. Rev. issued

Service Manual: Digital Video Camera Recorder

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Digital Video Camera Recorder

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: Digital Video Camera Recorder

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCR-DVD100/DVD100E

US Model Canadian Model

Digital Video Camera Recorder

Rechargeable battery pack NP-FM50

HELP (List of caution points is shown here.)

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

REPAIR PARTS LIST

SECTION 1 SERVICE NOTE

TO TAKE OUT A CASSETTE WHEN NOT EJECT (FORCE EJECT)

NOTES ON HANDLING THE OPTICAL PICK-UP

PRECAUTION FOR CHECKING EMISSION OF LASER DIODE

1-2. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE TABLE

Zoom operations fault (Cannot initialize zoom lens.)

The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.

PD-188 board service position

SERVICE POSITION TO CHECK THE DVD DRIVE SECTION

NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. F PANEL SECTION

2 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)

4 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)

6 FP-605 flexible board (22P)

1 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)

2-2. MA-420 BOARD

1 Microphone unit (4P)

2 Three tapping screws (M1.7 3.5)

2-3. CABINET (R) SECTION

4 Two screws (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)

2 Two screws (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)

5 Three screws (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)

9 Cabinet (R) section

7 CPC lid (bottom)

6 Two screws (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)

2-4. SIDE CABINET (25) ASSEMBLY

3 Set the LCD panel, as shown in the figure.

1 Three tapping screws (M1.7 5)

2 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (black)

7 5 Side cabinet (25) assembly

2-5. P CABINET (C)(25M) ASSEMBLY

4 P cabinet (C) (25) assembly

1 Screw (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (silver)

[PD-188 BOARD SERVICE POSITION]

Adjustment remote commander (RM-95)

AC power adaptor CPC-8 jig (J-6082-388-A)

2-6. LCD UNIT

4 PV-018 harness (20P)

7 LCD unit 3 FP-612 flexible board (6P)

5 Two screws (M1.7 4), grip

2-7. PD-188 BOARD

1 Two screws (M1.7 4), lock ace, p2 (silver)

2-8. LIQUID CRYSTAL INDICATOR MODULE

1 P frame assembly (25)

5 Back light Cold cathode fluorescent tube 4 Claw

6 Liquid crystal indicator module

7 P cabinet (M) (25)

2-9. LCD HINGE ASSEMBLY

7 FP-612 flexible board 2 Screw (M1.7 2.5) lock ace, p2

1 4 Hinge cover (U) (25) 5 Claw 8 PV-018 harness

9 LCD Hinge assembly 6 Hinge cover (O) (25)